《Stronger [interactive RPG]》 Part 1 – The Dead behemoth ¡°DAMN!¡± The explicit pierced through the thick dust that filled the plain. But, it wasn''t a plain at all. Twenty seconds prior, that is. For what was once a vast forested area has now been reduced to dust, and as said dust settled, one would notice that the once luscious green scenery has now been reduced into a ragged desert. ¡°Damn! Shit! The hell.... Now what?!¡± The chain of explicits came from a man in his late twenties. He is currently trying to tear out his golden hair which seem to be discolored by some sort of brown pigment. ¡°This wasn''t supposed to happen! All I wanted was a drink! I''ve been sober for ten years! Can''t the world just give me a break?!¡± He started cursing again, this time, stomping a foot. A crack appeared beneath it, crawling towards the body of a fallen soldier, two meters in front of him. As the dust settled, it showed several other bodies bathed beneath the gray light of the early dawn. There were hundreds of soldiers, burned and charred beyond recognition, and at the middle of the plain, still standing on its enormous hind legs and long horned tail, stood half the corpse of a gigantic behemoth. ¡°Damn...¡±, he gave a last curse as he surveyed the area with a sigh. ¡°Well, there doesn¡¯t seem to be any survivors,¡± another sigh. ¡°Guess that means there aren''t any witnesses either.¡± A large grin broke underneath a mass of thick brown tinted beard. ¡°And it''s not as if I killed any of them...¡± He was about to walk away when he heard something metallic fall on the ground behind him. He turned around and was face to face with a shaking suit of armor holding on to a chipped bastard sword. ¡°Y-you...¡± the armor stuttered. ¡°Y-you... k-killed it... i-in one s-shot!!!¡± The man stared at the knight, his jaw hanging. ¡°Y-you... easily killed the b-behemoth... that took out the Twin Kingdoms'' army! W-we have been trying to suppress it... for seven days and seven nights... I was the last one standing... as my brothers... my brothers... all lost their lives...¡± The suit of armor buckled up and shook harder as who ever was inside began to sob hysterically. ¡°Ugh... a witness...¡± the man mumbled. ¡°And here, I promised not to take an innocent life...¡± ¡°M-my lord and master!¡± said the suit of armor who now lay groveling at his feet. ¡°Please, tell me what your name is! Who is the hero who ¨C ¡± ¡°Sorry...¡± the man cut him off.
CHOICES: What would the mysterious man do? [Make excuses] go to Part 2 [Get rid of the witness] go to Part 3
The genuine version of this novel can be found on another site. Support the author by reading it there. PART 2 – The Hero in Hiding ¡°Sorry, I''m just a passer by who witnessed the same thing you did,¡± the man interrupted him. ¡±I have no idea what happened here...¡± ¡°N-nonsense!¡± the suit interjected. ¡°I saw it with my own eyes!¡± He pulled at his battered helmet and revealed a youthful face haloed by wavy golden hair. He looked no older than 15, his soft, handsome features marred by a bloody gash on his left brow. His blue eyes shined as he stared at the image of his savior before him. ¡°You suddenly appeared in front of me as I stood with this cliff¡¯s precipice behind my back and was about to give my last breath to save the Twin Kingdoms against that evil behemoth!¡± he said in one breath. ¡°I was about to give up all hope, but just as I raised my sword, you fell from the heavens and immediately attacked the behemoth as it was about to blast me with its fiery breath!¡± ¡°No... I actually slipped from the path up there and fell off the cliff...¡± the man mumbled while pointing up the hill. ¡°Look, this was just a mistake... I had a... little drink... and only acted on instinct after seeing that bastard aiming at me...¡± He pointing at the half carcass in the middle of the plain. ¡°You raised a hand and sent a blinding beam of light that killed the behemoth! When even the greatest of wizards from my father''s court were not able to wound its thick hide!¡± ¡°I-it was as accident!¡± the man repeated. ¡°You didn''t even break a sweat as you did so!¡± the prince continued staring at him with wide glittering eyes. ¡°I told you, I was drunk!¡± the man insisted, but the prince refused to listen to his excuses. ¡°You are just like the Golden Hero of legend who killed the eight headed manticore and defeated the Demon King in the war of Liberation twenty years a-¡± The lad in armor stopped mid sentence as he noticed the streaks of gold near the roots of the man''s brown hair. He then remembered the golden light that emerged from his savior''s hand. He tried to catch the gaze of the golden eyes beneath furrowed brows, but the man refused to face him. ¡°Look here kid,¡± the man said after an exasperated sigh. ¡°Like I said, this is just a big misunderstanding. I''m no hero. I don''t know what happened here or what ever it is you''re talking about.¡± ¡°But-¡± ¡°For all I know, you were the one who killed that thing! You probably showed some super final ultimate move due to desperation!¡± ¡°But you...¡± ¡°I''m just a good for nothing drunkard who is on his way back to my hut in the woods to get some slee...¡± The man¡¯s words trailed off as he looked at the vast plain that was once the woods that housed his hut. ¡°FuuuuuucK!¡± The next few minutes were filled with another chain of explicits. The young knight spent this time trying to remove his dented armor the best he could. It took him some effort to remove just half of it, and found it impossible to get his left greave off. He seemed to have broken his leg, and the pain was just beginning to overwhelm him after the initial shock. All the while, the mysterious drunkard who saved him pulled at his hair and cursed some more. ¡°Master, if you would allow, please tell this unworthy knight the name of his savior?¡± he asked when the man finally ran out of curses. The man was now squatting on the ground with his back to him. He slowly turned his head, glared at the prince in annoyance, and sighed. ¡°Just call me Will.¡± He stood up with a grunt and looked at the lad before him and mumbled. ¡°So. What now?¡± ¡°Master Will should come to the Twin Kingdoms with me to receive your just rewards!¡± ¡°I wasn''t talking to you!¡± Will grumbled. ¡°Oh...¡± the lad looked around the area. ¡°I was talking to myself,¡± Will said with another sigh. It was starting to get lighter as morning approached, but he can''t seem to see anybody else around. ¡°What did you say your name was?¡± ¡°M-my name is Prince Simon, the 17th prince from the Twin Kingdoms, particularly, the Eastern Twin, 9th son of King Stephanus, and 34th to the throne.¡± The fair prince gave a shy smile as he said this and waited for his savior¡¯s reply. ¡°Meh,¡± Will mumbled. ¡°And you said that your brothers are all dead?¡± ¡°Oh, I meant my brother knights... my royal brothers are back in the army settlement about three miles from here...¡± ¡°Hmph... A disposable pawn. Less competition.¡± The prince blushed upon hearing this. The two went silent. ¡°Can you get up?¡± Will finally asked the prince. ¡°I-I think I just need a bit of rest...¡± Simon stuttered. ¡°My armor gets heavier by the minute, and I seem to have broken my left leg...¡± He kept his face down as he felt Will''s gaze upon him. He was too ashamed of his weakness, and yet, too proud to see the pity in Will¡¯s eyes. ¡°Haa... I guess it can''t be helped then...¡±
CHOICES: [Just leave the kid to die] go to Part 4 [Can''t help but help the poor kid] go to Part 5
This story originates from a different website. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there. PART 3 – Getting Rid of Witnesses ¡°Damn, sucks to be you...¡± said the ragged looking man. ¡°What do you -- ¡± The man raised a hand to silence the knight before him, and pointing at his broken armor, sent a thin ray of light towards him, moving his finger in a slashing motion. The knight never knew what hit him as he fell on the ground in two pieces. ¡°Sorry,¡± the man mumbled as he went on his way, ¡°but I can''t afford to lose my freedom.¡±
bad ending ??
Royal Road is the home of this novel. Visit there to read the original and support the author. PART 4 – Just leave the kid to die ¡° ¡°W-where are you going?¡± Simon asked him.¡± ¡°Home. Or whatever''s left of it,¡± Will said with a snarl. ¡°I''ll give you two choices, would you want me to end your life quickly here, or do you prefer to let the wild animals do it for you?¡± Unauthorized use: this story is on Amazon without permission from the author. Report any sightings. ¡°W-what do you mean...¡± ¡°I am quite content with the way I am living now, you see,¡± said Will, ¡°leaving something bothersome like you alive might only cause me problems. So would you rather die now painlessly or wait for nature to take its course, and possibly, be eaten alive?¡± Simon stared at Will wide-eyed.
CHOICES: [choose to die painlessly] go to Part 6 [fight to survive] go to Part 7
PART 5 – Can’t Help But Help the Poor Kid Prince Simon was surprised when two sturdy hands lifted him effortlessly off his feet, and gently slung him across a broad shoulder. Will smelled strongly of spirits and a musky scent that meant he hasn''t bathed in days. ¡±It won''t do... this won''t do...¡± Will muttered. ¡±If there were no survivors, then they could simply say that the twin armies died and took the behemoth with them. But then here you are...¡± ¡±B-but, you were the one who killed it, Master Will...¡± ¡±And I told you, I didn''t!¡± he snapped. ¡±You should just tell everyone that you killed the monster yourself!¡± ¡±But that would be a lie!¡± ¡±Shut up kid!¡± Will slapped the prince''s rump. ¡°Ow!¡± If you spot this narrative on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation. ¡±Have you any idea how long it took me to hide from the empire?! This unnecessary attention would...¡± he paused. ¡°Just tell them that you did it!¡± ¡°But they would never believe something like that...¡± Prince Simon insisted. ¡±I-I mean... I am one of the youngest and weakest of all of my brothers, they would never believe that I would be able to do such a noble deed on my own! They would rather believe that I hid behind a boulder while I watched the twin armies die fighting the behemoth!¡± ¡±At least you''re alive. You''ve got your wounds to show off, and surviving is a feat in itself. It can give you enough honor to rise in the hierarchy.¡± ¡±Well... if you put it that way...¡± Prince Simon said thoughtfully. ¡±Exactly. Actually going to the battle field is still far better than staying in a tent miles away.¡± ¡±And I guess that''s something my brothers can never take away from me, right?¡± Simon said happily. He was actually starting to feel proud of his achievement when Will stopped in his tracks. ¡±Unless...¡± he mumbled. ¡±They actually take it from you...¡± ¡±Master Will, how could they possibly do such a thing unless they decide to take my life?¡± Simon said with a soft chuckle that made Will feel even more miserable.
Go to Part 8
PART 6 – A Painless Death Prince Simon stared at his savior wide-eyed. He did not realize how much of a burden he had been to such a valiant person. ¡±I-if it is your will, Master Will, then let it be done.¡± Simon hung his head low. Royal Road is the home of this novel. Visit there to read the original and support the author. He gave a deep sigh, as he awaited Master Will''s killing stroke. He was a bit surprised to see that he actually felt at peace with himself. His brothers at arms were all dead. His family had used him as a disposable pawn. And now he was a danger to the person who had saved the Twin Kingdoms from the behemoth which could have easily burnt it to the ground at the blink of an eye. He was contemplating the short life he had lived, when he noticed that the killing blow never came.
Go to Part 5
PART 7 – I want to Survive! ¡°Get away from me, you crazy drunk!¡± Due to sudden fear and desperation, Prince Simon was able to raise himself up from an adrenaline rush that pushed his body to the limit. He dragged his broken leg along and used his sword as a cane to try and run away from the mad man who threatened to end his life. He was so blinded with fear that he didn''t notice that Will didn''t even bother to chase after him. For what seemed like hours, he tried his best to find the path that led back to their military encampment, but he was getting weaker by the minute, his blood, leaving a dark trail on the ground, until he fell exhausted and out of breath. ¡°Will this be the end of me?¡± he asked no one in particular, as his sight grew dimmer and dimmer. "Over here!" he heard voices before he blacked out completely. He woke up a week later, his leg amputated, his body so weak and full of pain that he wished he just died with his brothers at arms. "You should be proud of your accomplishment!" they told him when they finally brought him home. "How could you have beaten such a monster?" they asked. But Simon just smiled sadly in reply. He knew how they laughed at his back and say that he ran away while his companions gave their lives to stop the behemoth. Besides, he was too ashamed to take the glory all to himself. Too scared to tell a soul about the mysterious man who tried to silence him. "At least I am still alive..." he kept reassuring himself, "even though I don''t deserve to be..." And so, he lived the rest of his life as the impaired prince without a thing to his name, haunted by nightmares and tormented by his peers, until the end of his days.
the end
Stolen from its rightful place, this narrative is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings. PART 8 – The New Hero ¡°Did you hear the news?¡± ¡°The 9th prince of the Twin Kingdom''s Eastern Twin, Prince Simon, killed the monstrous behemoth from the fiery pits of mount Mal-veda!¡± ¡°He was the sole survivor of the 500 strong army from the Twin Kingdoms!¡± ¡°I remember the night sky lit up that day, as if the sun suddenly appeared in the south!¡± ¡°And half of the once vast Dark Woods of Elenore suddenly turned into a wasteland!¡± ¡°Did you see what happened to the behemoth that day?!¡± ¡°You mean, what was left of it? The top half has incinerated, as if a hole was removed in space, leaving its guts all over the place!¡± ¡°It was a pity though... seeing all those burned knights and soldiers littered in the battle field...¡± ¡°Much better than letting the behemoth pass the Woods and into the villages! thousands of lives would have been lost then!¡± ¡°Truly, young prince Simon is the new hero of the kingdom!¡± These are the stories that flooded from village to village until it reached the army settlement of the Twin Kingdoms three miles away. ¡°What ridiculous news are you rambling about?!¡± First Prince Juno snapped at the messenger kneeling in front of him. ¡°We have been waiting ten days for some good news, and this baseless rumor is all you have to tell me?!¡± ¡°As if that little maggot can do more than raise that bastard sword two feet off the ground?¡± laughed second Prince Largos. ¡°B-but your majesties... this is 1st hand news coming from the head priest of the Stone Temple,¡± the messenger said hesitantly. ¡°They are currently treating the injuries Prince Simon received during last night¡¯s battle, he was even given a hero''s welcome in Weezer''s Village this morning,¡± he continued. ¡°He was brought to an inn by a hunter who witnessed the feat. They said the young prince suddenly released a powerful force that killed the behemoth in one shot!¡± The two princes looked at each other. The elder gave the other a small nod. ¡°Leave us.¡± The messenger quickly left the spacious tent that housed a large canopy bed, a long dining table, and a couple of long couches where each prince were seated. ¡°So. The maggot is still alive...¡± mumbled Largos. ¡°And here I was, waiting for some favorable news...¡± ¡°I thought you said the army was just enough to weaken the behemoth so that we could easily put an end to it when it finally reached this place?¡± Prince Juno glared at him. ¡°You even had the useless princes from the Western Twin to set traps along the way!¡± ¡°Isn''t that exactly why I only sent two knights with Simon?¡± Largos told his older brother. ¡±Who would have thought that he would awaken some kind of ¡®power¡¯ through sheer luck?!?¡± ¡°Hmph... and now that the news of his ''miraculous'' win has spread far and wide, we wouldn''t even be able to take his achievement for our own...¡± ¡°But then again, we could downplay his achievements and say that he''s simply reaping the benefits of his fallen comrades.¡± ¡°Idiot!¡± Juno glared at his brother. ¡°Are you not thinking? This is no longer just a mere ''achievement''! Just being the sole survivor is enough to garner praise in Father¡¯s court! It would have been much better if there were no survivors at all.¡± ¡°Then we must hurry to the Stone Temple and make sure that he doesn''t survive!¡± said Largos with an evil grin. ¡°And what if it''s true that he did attain some kind of power?!¡± Juno asked. ¡°Then it would be best to attack right when he least expects it. We must get rid of him before he recovers from his injuries.¡± ¡°Ugggh... it hurts so much...¡± whimpered Prince Simon as he laid face down on the bed. This book is hosted on another platform. Read the official version and support the author''s work. ¡°His majesty''s wounds need to be cleansed periodically for it to heal,¡± said a priest beside him who wore the gray robes of the Stone Temple priests. ¡°It is inevitable that we also set your broken leg so that it may recover properly.¡± ¡°Hnn... I know that, your eminence, it is just that, I have never been through such pain before...¡± ¡®I can¡¯t help but think, though, that what my brothers have been putting me through, are nothing compared to this,¡¯ he thought to himself. ''I suddenly realized that all their mean tricks are merely pranks that children play...¡¯ ¡°How is your majesty doing?¡± He looked up from the pillow he was hugging and saw a group of three priests enter the airy room he was staying in. A couple of servants waited behind them. ¡°I-I have been better...¡± he said, trying to sound spirited. ¡°We apologize that we cannot give you better accommodations befitting your majesty, this is a humble monastery after all,¡± said an elderly priest with a bald head and long white beard trailing to his chest. ¡°No, no, I am most thankful, High Priest Roshan!¡± Simon quickly replied. ¡°Your healers have taken most of the pain away, now only my broken leg ails me,¡± he tried to grin. ¡°May I ask though, where my companion Will has gone to?¡± ¡°Do you mean the hunter Will from the Dark woods of Elenor?¡± asked one of the priests. ¡°He said that he was going back to his hut to salvage anything that the battle might have spared of his belongings.¡± ¡°Ah... the Dark Woods...¡± mumble Simon as one of the priests helped him to sit up. ¡°Do not worry, your Highness,¡± another assured him, ¡°he does not blame you for turning half of the woods into a wasteland.¡± ¡°That is correct,¡± said High Priest Roshan. ¡°None of us blame you, for we know what would have happened if the behemoth got past the dark woods. It was already a miracle that you were able to keep it at bay for seven days, after it emerged from the fiery pit of mount Mal-veda.¡± ¡°We are ever thankful and forever indebted to your Majesty''s heroic deed.¡± The four priests bowed low as they said this, while Simon could do nothing but force a weak smile. ''Actually, half of the woods was already burnt by the behemoth when Will appeared,'' he thought to himself. ''Dark ash surrounded the area and covered the bodies of my comrades who tried desperately to protect me. Master Will¡¯s powerful blast simply blew all the ashes away.'' He couldn''t help but shed tears at the memory of their battle. He will forever be haunted by that accursed image ¨C of the monstrous devil-horse-face of the behemoth with its two pairs of eyes fixed upon him. He lifted his bastard sword as high as he could back then, trying hard not to drop it, even as he shook so badly from head to toe. He was mad with fear as the behemoth took in a deep breath, a pinprick of red light forming in it''s cavernous mouth, growing bigger and bigger by the second. It was then that his savior Will suddenly dropped in front of him. He simply raised an arm, and blew the behemoth up into oblivion! ¡°D-did Will say when he will be back?¡± he asked the priests. ¡°He did not mention, your Majesty, but we can send a summons to him if you wish.¡± ¡°He was a god sent helper who gave you first aid before you bled to death!¡± ¡°It was god''s plan that he was on his way home after a night in the tavern.¡± ¡°Yes, please, please tell him that I need to see him soon...¡± Simon blurted out. The four priests looked questioningly at him. ¡°I-I would like to thank him properly...¡± he quickly added. ¡°F-for helping me get back to the village... and to reward him generously as well...¡± ¡°Of course, your Majesty,¡± the four gave another bow. ¡°We shall now leave you to take some more rest.¡± Simon gave a long sigh as he lay down on the bed once more. ''What have I gotten myself into now...?'' he thought to himself. ''All I wanted was to prove myself to my brothers and to make my father, even a little bit proud of me... we were just supposed to stay long enough to keep the behemoth in the woods while my brothers came with reinforcements... We were supposed to rush back to the encampment if the behemoth breaks through the traps we prepared. We had no idea it was that big... that we would hardly be able to keep it in the woods for a week! That all my brothers would die just to keep me alive...¡¯ Simon sobbed in misery, but there was nothing he could do now. He can not turn back time, neither could he go against the words of the real hero who saved him.
Go to Part 9
PART 9 – The Drill ¡°This is what you''re to tell everyone,¡± Will drilled into Simon back then. ¡°You were backed up against a literal cliff wall, and was about to be killed by the behemoth, when you suddenly felt a sharp burning sensation beneath your chest...¡± ¡°In my stomach?¡± Simon asked his savior. ¡°Nope! It''s beneath your chest!¡± Will replied, slapping Simon on the rump. ¡°That''s your soul flex! Where it hurts most when punched.¡± ¡°Oh, you mean the solar plexus?¡± ¡°What else do you think I meant?¡± Another slap. ¡°Ouch!¡± ¡°Anyway, it''s a sharp burning pain that feels like your body''s breaking from the inside out, and you just want to scream and push it out of your body, and hurl it at the ugly mug of that damn monster...¡± ¡°Umm... okay...¡± ¡°Remember the feeling! The sharp burning pain! Like your body¡¯s breaking up in the middle!¡± Will repeated. ¡°B-but... what if they ask me to do it again?¡± ¡°Tell them you''re too weak to do anything for now,¡± Will continued. ¡°Would they really believe that?¡± Simon asked doubtfully. ¡°Of course. First times are always unstable, most times, it''s just a fluke. And that''s better than keeping the kingdom''s hopes up on you. You could simply say that you wasted all your new found magic away in one attack.¡± ¡°T-that could actually happen?¡± ¡°Of course!¡± Simon could hear the confidence in Will''s voice. ''Well, if he really is the legendary hero that disappeared twenty years ago, then he must know what he''s talking about!'' ¡°But, master Will, why is it that you want to go so far as to lie to the whole kingdom?¡± he asked next. ¡°Why must you hide the truth and even refuse to accept the fame that rightfully belongs to you?¡± Will''s gait lost its pace. ¡°Hmph. Who needs fame and honor?¡± he spat out. ¡°You just get pilled up with bothersome chores and endless responsibilities, not to mention, a long list of fake comrades who each have a dagger hidden behind their back!¡± ¡°S-so... it is true! You are the Lost Hero Lu- ouch!¡± ¡°Stop spouting nonsense!¡± Simon was interrupted by another slap on his back side. ¡°That selfish bastard''s probably dead by now... probably lost all his magic in the last war of Liberation, and already drank himself to an early grave... Besides, isn''t the mention of that bastard''s name taboo for turning traitor against the Imperial family and for leaving the 1st princess in front of the altar on their wedding day?¡± Simon decided to keep his mouth shut at this. He wasn¡¯t even born yet when the Golden Hero disappeared, and they came from such a small and insignificant rural kingdom that the fighting hardly reached them at all. In fact, they weren¡¯t even part of the empire back then. If you encounter this tale on Amazon, note that it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it. What he knew were merely tales from his old nanny. Of how the Golden Hero was able to defeat the last Demon King with the help of the young Emperor Jonas and his sister, the 1st Princess Ann, high mage next to none, but the Golden Hero himself. The Golden Hero was younger than Simon is now when they started on their journey. He wielded a bastard sword and was blessed with such strong holy power that he glowed golden as the rays of sun god Solis''s light. He tried to turn and look at the filthy back of the man who was currently carrying him like a sack of potatoes. ''Perhaps he really is a different person...'' he thought with a scowl, falling limp on his savior''s back. ''Will is definitely nothing like what the stories say about the golden hero... but still...¡¯ ¡°Still, I know what I know, and I have seen what I have seen!¡± said Simon stubbornly as he lay in bed. ¡°And I have made up my mind to forever follow master Will wherever he goes, may he be the lost hero, or a nameless hunter. He had saved this useless life of mine, and now it rightfully belongs to him.¡± These were the last words Prince Simon mumbled in the dark room, as a cool summer breeze blew the thin white curtains that covered the half opened panes of the windows that lined the far wall of his bedroom. His long lashes fluttered as it slowly covered the blue eyes that gave in to sleep. Soon, he is softly snoring, his body still recovering from the battle it endured the past night. He did not notice when one of the window panes swung wide open, making not a noise, or how a gloved hand reached in to pull a body clad in black into the room. The body reached inside its tunic and held out a sharp blade that glinted in the moonlight. The assassin went towards the bed and looked at the innocent face of the boy lying with his red lips slightly parted. His slim, long neck was as white as parchment, and the thought of tainting it with red blood made the assassin¡¯s heart race with anticipation. He paused for a while, regretting that he didn¡¯t have time to do more, when he felt strong animosity hit him like a brick wall. ¡°You sure work fast.¡± The assassin tried to turn around to face the speaker, but he couldn''t move. The palpable anger in the air was so terrifying that he couldn''t even breath. ¡°I guess I really can''t leave this kid by himself.¡± There was a gust of wind, and suddenly, the room was empty once more, aside from the young prince sleeping contently, ignorant of how close he was to losing his life once again.
Go to Part 10
PART 10 – Thirty Years Ago It happened about 30 years ago. The people of the continent ruled by the Demon King Astor decided that they had had enough and sent warriors to the central plains to try and overthrow the tyrant''s rule. There were originally 6 of them, from the 6 major kingdoms that made up the continent. They sent their best warriors and their strongest armies, praying that they would be enough to stop the Demon King, but it was only four years later that they actually saw a glimmer of hope. He came in the form of a boy clad in golden armor. A child of 12 years who carried a bastard sword as if it was merely a wooden toy. He was a farmer¡¯s son with hair of gold and honey brown eyes, and the armor he wore which was too big for him, was merely taken from fallen knights he passed along his way towards the central plains. He had the strength of a hundred men and magic equal to none, and his arrival was the start of the Demon King''s demise. It took 5 years for the Golden Hero and his six companions to decimate the Demon King''s army. As the end of the war neared, the Golden Hero, together with Prince Jonas, his sister Ann from the kingdom of Maralict, and several other warriors, were finally able to kill the Demon King Astor. After the battle, Prince Jonas Maralict was crowned Emperor and united the continent as the Holy Maralict Empire. His sister Princess Ann got the title of 1st Imperial Princess, and was engaged to the Golden Hero. Simon turned the page of the book he was reading and was disappointed to see that the passage ended there. He placed the book down on the table and sipped his tea that had already turned tepid. ¡°Your Highness, are you still busy reading?¡± Simon looked up and saw High Priest Roshan smiling down at him as he caressed his long beard. ¡°Your Reverence, I didn¡¯t notice you enter the library...¡± ¡°Are you still reading about the War of Liberation?¡± asked the old priest as he sat on a chair beside the young prince. ¡°May I ask what makes you so interested to know about the previous war?¡± ¡°I was hoping to read about the legendary Golden Hero, but it seems that there are hardly any written accounts about him.¡± ¡°Ahh, that is due to the royal degree from the emperor himself,¡± said the priest. ¡°After that Hero¡¯s betrayal, all mention of his name was removed from all texts and history books. It was the empire¡¯s way to make the people forget about his traitorous acts.¡± ¡°But how could they do that to the person who single-handedly killed the Demon King? How could they just erase him from the empire¡¯s history?!¡± The priest looked at Simon, his white furry brows rising slightly as a smile played on his wrinkled lips. ¡°And where, pray tell, did you hear about such things? When all the empire knows that it was no other than the young Emperor Jonas and his sister Princess Ann who overthrew the Demon king¡¯s dark reign? Some even say that Emperor Jonas himself was the Golden Hero.¡± ¡°I...¡± Simon was hesitant. ¡°I heard it from my nanny!¡± he finally admitted. ¡°She was the lady-in-waiting of one of the Demon King¡¯s concubines, and she was there when the Golden Hero and his companions took siege of the Dark Realm and killed the Demon King!¡± ¡°And I am guessing that she has already told you not to tell others about such stories?¡± Simon lowered his head and went silent. ¡°I guess you have noticed it too,¡± the priest continued, ¡°the books here in the Stone Temple still have details about the Golden Hero, though it is very minimal.¡± ¡°Yes, your Reverence, these books are the only ones I¡¯ve seen that mention of the Golden Hero at all! And like you just mentioned, some books from the capital even say that Emperor Jonas and the Golden Hero are one and the same!¡± ¡°That is because we of the Stone Temple Priests believe that truth should never be clouded by selfish desires.¡± Support the author by searching for the original publication of this novel. ¡°Then, why does the history books here in your library only tell the basic of stories and end with Princess Ann¡¯s engagement? And why is it that I haven¡¯t seen a single one that mentions his name?¡± ¡°Because even as High Clerics of the Goddess Caelum, we are still under the Empire¡¯s rule, and writing such histories may cost us our lives,¡± said the priest with a sad smile. ¡°But why would Emperor Jonas go to such lengths just to hide the truth?¡± Simon blurted out. ¡°Does he want all the glory for himself? Or is it true that the Golden Hero made a sin so vile that he was branded as a traitor?¡± ¡°Ah... these questions are hard to answer, young prince, and even harder to understand...¡± the priest slowly shook his head. ¡°You must first realize that politics runs a government, and an emperor should be inferior to none, lest others decide to take his place.¡± ¡°What do you mean, your Reverence?¡± asked Simon. ¡°It means that going against the Emperor¡¯s orders and making him lose face, is as treacherous as plotting an assassination.¡± ¡°But... doesn¡¯t doing so make him like the tyrant they just overthrew? What exactly did the Emperor order the Golden Hero to do?¡± Simon asked once more. The old priest gave a sigh and leaned back comfortably on his wooden chair. ¡°As it was told to me by one of my fellow Stone Temple priests from the capital, there was only one favor that the Emperor asked the Golden Hero.¡± ¡°And what could that be?¡± Simon asked impatiently. ¡°That he would stay by his side and rule the Empire together as Imperial Princess Ann¡¯s husband.¡± ¡°And he refused that offer?¡± Simon frowned. ¡°Was the Princess that ugly?¡± ¡°Hold your tongue, boy,¡± the priest chuckled. ¡°It is said that the 1st Imperial Princess, Ann Maralict, was the fairest in all the Empire, even now that 20 years have already passed.¡± ¡°Then, why? He could have lived in plenty with a beautiful wife, he would still be the Golden Hero and had wanted for nothing more if he just accepted the Emperor¡¯s offer!¡± ¡°Then perhaps, he simply did not love the princess, as well as the kind of live that they offered.¡± Prince Simon frowned at the old priest. The old man simply smiled at him, his pale gray eyes mostly covered by his fluffy white brows. ¡°Couldn¡¯t he just try it out first?¡± Simon insisted, making the priest chuckle even more. ¡°Do you know what the seven warriors fought for?¡± he asked the prince in return. ¡°To be free of the tyrant¡¯s rule!¡± Simon quickly replied. ¡°Why then, would he be willing to give up this freedom?¡± the priest replied. ¡°And could one simply ¡®try¡¯ a marriage out?¡± Simon¡¯s mouth opened, but he was lost for words. He watched as the old priest placed his hands on the table pilled up with books he had been reading all day. His Reverence pushed against the table to stand up. ¡°It is time for supper, your Highness,¡± he said as he made his way towards the library¡¯s door. ¡°You may leave the books on the table, some of the helpers will put them back for you.¡± ¡°Y-yes, of course...¡± Simon raised himself up as well, with the help of two wooden crutches. He limped after the old priest, out the library where two helpers stood waiting. They were dressed in the gray hooded robes of the Stone Temple priests, but had a short veil covering their faces, signifying that they haven¡¯t given their vows yet to officially join the congregation. They bowed low as the two of them passed by. ¡°Thank you for letting me use the Temple¡¯s library, and thank you for letting me stay here to heal my injuries.¡± ¡°Think nothing of it, your Highness, for truly, we are the ones who are indebted to you.¡± ¡°S-still, I plan to send tributes to the Stone Temple as soon as get home...¡± Simon continued. ¡°As soon as my father recognizes my deeds for s-slaying the monstrous behemoth.¡± ¡°Then I pray that you get home safe and look forward to any help you can send us,¡± said the old priest. ¡°I heard that your two older brothers arrived in town this afternoon?¡± ¡°Yes, your Reverence, they stayed in the inn since they were tired from traveling. It¡¯s three miles of rough terrain from their encampment to here, after all. They have been traveling for a day and a half.¡± ¡°And you will be leaving with them tomorrow morning?¡± ¡°That is also right, your Reverence.¡± ¡°Yet your injuries haven¡¯t completely healed...¡± The priest turned around to face him. ¡°I am worried that the long journey back to your kingdom may cause you a lot of discomfort.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry, your Reverence, I¡¯m sure my brothers will keep me comfortable along the way,¡± said Simon, smiling shyly. ¡°Nevertheless, I have decided to send one of our own with you to help you recover.¡± The priest signaled to one of the helpers trailing behind them. One of the veiled helpers came forward and bowed at them. ¡°This is Nell. He is a healer. Though he haven¡¯t made his vows yet, he is very talented and would surely be of much help to you during the journey.¡± ¡°T-thank you, your Reverence,¡± Simon replied. ¡°But, isn¡¯t it forbidden for members of the Stone Temple congregation to leave the temple before making their vows?¡± he asked. ¡°On the contrary,¡± replied the old priest. ¡°Unknown to many, we let our priest candidates leave the temple a year before they take their vows, as a way to say goodbye to all earthly temptations. It acts as their final test as well. They leave the monastery as ordinary folk in peasant attire to live as common folk and taste the outside world before they give their freedom up to serve a greater purpose.¡± ¡°Then, this person, Nell...¡± ¡°He¡¯s ripe for the final test,¡± the priest said with a smile. ¡°And I believe that coming to the Twin Kingdoms with you would make him an even better priest in the future. Isn¡¯t that right, Nell?¡± The helper named Nell simply bowed lower in reply. ¡°Then, I would gladly take him with me, and I thank you for all your kindness.¡±
Go to Part 11
Part 12 – A Carriage Ride ¡°Y-you don¡¯t expect me to ride a horse in my condition, do you?¡± Simon asked his brothers. ¡°Don¡¯t you think it¡¯s too much since I still have a broken leg?¡± Simon took a deep breath. ¡°I-I just s-stopped the behemoth from destroying a town, and possibly, our own Twin Kingdoms, yet you plan to treat me this way?¡± His two brothers looked at him uncertainly. ¡°Well, if you insist... but like I said, we did not bring a carriage with us this time...¡± said Juno. ¡°T-then, perhaps the Stone Temple Priests can lend us a wagon, at least?¡± Simon looked at the hall¡¯s gray wall, where a line of acolytes stood silently. One of them stepped forward and gave a curt bow. ¡°By the way, brothers,¡± Simon suddenly remembered, ¡°this is Nell, a priest in training who is gifted with healing magic. His Reverence, the High Priest Roshan, told him to accompany me so that he could continue healing me along the way,¡± he continued. ¡°He shall be staying with me for a year, as a kind of passage towards priesthood.¡± The two elder princes looked at each other, then at Nell who stood with his veiled face bowed low. ¡°Suit yourself,¡± Prince Juno muttered before exiting the hall. It didn¡¯t take too long for the three princes to leave. Most of the congregation were busy in their chores and morning meditation, that only the old head priest was available to see them off. He instructed some of the priests in training to prepare a carriage and line it with some linen so that Simon would have a comfortable ride at the back. The retinue left as soon as it was ready. His two elder brothers lead the way with the wagon behind them and Nell trailing behind in his pack horse. They arrived in town about an hour later, and went straight to the only hotel in the area. Simon went straight to his room to get some rest while they prepared for their much longer journey home. ¡°It seems like something has changed in our younger brother Simon,¡± said Juno as soon as he entered his room with his brother Largos. Unauthorized use of content: if you find this story on Amazon, report the violation. ¡°That¡¯s right... it seems we have underestimated him,¡± replied Largos. ¡°Perhaps he did acquire some kind of power from his battle from the behemoth.¡± ¡°True... he wouldn¡¯t have the gall to speak up to us, if that wasn¡¯t the case,¡± Juno said thoughtfully. ¡°Come to think of it, all five assassins we¡¯ve sent to finish him off, have failed to report back, and yet that worm looks healthier than the day we sent him to the Dark Woods!¡± ¡°What do you think we should do?¡± Largos asked. ¡°The best action we can take is to accompany him home,¡± Juno frowned. ¡°Let¡¯s weigh our options while observing him along the way. If he still seems weak and stupid, then I myself will make sure that he does not set foot on our kingdom alive.¡± ¡°Thank you for assisting me,¡± Simon told Nell as the novice priest pulled a chair out for him, ¡°but there¡¯s no need for you to fuss over me too much, the wagon ride down the monastery to this inn was quite comfortable.¡± Nell gave him a curt bow. ¡°But tell me, Nell, is Master Will really gone? Didn¡¯t he leave a message for me at least?¡± Nell shook his head slightly. ¡°He is my savior, if he didn¡¯t take me to town, and later, to your monastery, I would have long died together with by brothers at arms... and yet, I couldn¡¯t even thank him properly in the end...¡± His words were interrupted by a knock on the door. Nell opened it to find a group of people headed by a middle aged man with balding brown hair. ¡°Beg your pardon, your Majesty, Prince Simon,¡± said the man, ¡°I am the mayor of this humble town, and on behalf of our people, we would like to thank you for saving us from the evil behemoth...¡± The mayor bowed low before Simon, so did the townsfolk behind him. Simon slowly stood with Nell¡¯s help. ¡°Please, raise yourselves up!¡± he told the townsfolk, feeling a bit embarrassed. ¡°I only did what any noble would do for the people!¡± ¡°You saved our town and our lives!¡± the townsfolk exclaimed. ¡°We owe our lives to you, and will forever pledge to you our loyalty!¡± ¡°If only all royals were as noble as you.¡± ¡°It was the proper thing to do,¡± Simon insisted. ¡°Then please, take these small gifts we have prepared for you!¡± a gruff looking man said, handing him a golden brown pelt. ¡°This is the pelt of a Weezer Sun Bear, caught in winter when its fur is the most luscious!¡± ¡°This is a 500 year old mandrake root that was found in the deepest parts of Eleanor Forest,¡± said an elderly woman who held out a foot long root crop shaped like a hairy man with two (and a half) legs. ¡°This is the specialty from my bakery!¡± said a woman in an apron. Simon thanked them all for their generous gifts. They ended up filling one of the royal carriages with the products they deemed worthy to give their savior. The Sun Bear pelt helped a lot to cushion the carriage seat. Simon found himself looking forward to the bumpy journey back to the Twin Kingdoms. ¡®I guess it isn¡¯t so bad to be called a hero after all,¡¯ he found himself thinking as he made himself comfortable inside the carriage, ¡®even my brothers don¡¯t seem as scary as they were before, after all I¡¯ve been through. Besides, now that they think that I killed the behemoth myself, they would think twice before treating me the way they used to.¡¯ ¡°Prince Simon, we are ready to embark on our journey home,¡± one of his brother¡¯s knights informed him. ¡°I would like to have my healer accompany me in the carriage,¡± he told the knight. ¡°That way, he can heal me and make me feel more comfortable during the journey.¡± The knight eagerly complied and brought the novice priest to the carriage. The company made the trip even more bearable, even though the novice priest didn¡¯t have much to say, or rather, didn¡¯t say anything at all.
Go to Part 14
Part 11 – The Sound of Trumpets Morning came with the sound of trumpets. Prince Juno and Prince Largos arrived with their banners flying proudly in the air as they made their way to the Stone Temple Monastery to meet with their youngest brother, Prince Simon. The two princes showed up in an armor of gold and silver, their chargers clothed in splendid satin, worthy of the nobles who rode them. They were followed by their knights and pages, and the whole procession filled the main hall of the Stone Temple Monastery where Prince Simon sat on a wooden chair behind a long table. ¡°Brother Simon!¡± Juno exclaimed as he walked across the hall towards his younger sibling. ¡°This is a blessed day that we finally meet again, and you...¡± he looked at his brother, dressed in a simple while tunic. ¡°You, safe and sound and away from all harm!¡± he finished. Simon replied by raising himself on his wooden clutches. He stepped forward and welcomed his eldest brother with a tight hug. ¡°Brother Juno! Brother Largos! You have no idea how glad I am to see you!¡± we said, voice wavering. ¡°I thought I would never lay eyes on you again, much less, get back to our kingdom in one piece!¡± ¡°Nonsense!¡± Prince Largos went to Simon and embraced him as well. ¡°I never once doubted that you would be victorious in this endeavor! You are our brother after all!¡± ¡°So, tell us, what exactly happened that night?¡± asked Prince Juno. ¡°It¡¯s a long story,¡± said Simon with a tearful grin. ¡°Please take a sit, his Reverence is kind enough to prepare us some food as we celebrate our reunion!¡± This book was originally published on Royal Road. Check it out there for the real experience. Prince Juno eyed the old rickety wooden chair Simon pointed to him. Largos sat down first, pulling the chair closer to his younger brother, and fussed over him like a mother hen. ¡°I see your left leg is still injured, haven¡¯t the Stone Temple Priests healed it yet?¡± he asked. ¡°I¡¯m afraid not, it¡¯s only been four days, after all, and they said that it would take about a week to heal a crushed leg completely.¡± ¡°What about other injuries?¡± Juno asked, eyeing his brother closely. ¡°Did you not get any other wounds, aside from a crushed leg?¡± ¡°Oh, I had a gash on my right brow, and several scratches and bruises, and even cracked a rib, but the healers have taken care of all of them.¡± ¡°Any other wounds?¡± Largos asked again. ¡°Any burns or cuts?¡± ¡°No, I wasn¡¯t seriously burned, and the behemoth doesn¡¯t really have any weapons that could cut me...¡± ¡°I see...¡± Juno mumbled. ¡°Seeing that you are already fine, I suggest we get on our way.¡± Juno suddenly stood up. ¡°We should leave as soon as possible. It¡¯s a three day trip back to our kingdom, after all.¡± ¡°I guess you¡¯re right, brother,¡± Simon said timidly. He was hoping that they could stay a little bit longer so that he could show his brothers around the temple and introduce them to the priests he had befriended. But then again, it¡¯s not like he could just tour them around the place. ¡°Ready the horses, we shall leave at once!¡± Prince Juno called out to his retinue. ¡°H-horses?¡± Prince Simon asked hesitantly. ¡°Of course. Did you plan to travel on foot?¡± Prince Largos asked with a sarcastic grin. ¡°I-I was hoping that you could prepared a carriage for me, since my leg is still injured...¡± ¡°And why would we ¨C ¡± ¡°Well, of course we did,¡± Juno replied, cutting Largos off. ¡°Unfortunately, we left the carriage back in town. The trail up the monastery was too steep and ragged, after all.¡± Simon looked at his eldest brother. He remembered that the Stone Temple has carriages of its own for transporting goods, surely his brother¡¯s carriage is built much sturdier to climb the steep trail up the monastery?
CHOICES: What should Simon do? [decide to mention the carts in the monastery] ¨C go to Part 12 [decide it¡¯s okay to accept the horse ride] ¨C go to Part 13
Part 13 – A Horse Ride Simon gave a sigh. ¡°Then, please prepare an extra horse for my novice priest companion, Nell, as well,¡± he told his brothers. ¡°A novice priest?¡± Juno asked with a frown. Nell stepped forward from the line of helpers who stood silent against the hall¡¯s gray stone walls. ¡°He is a priest in training who is gifted with healing magic,¡± Simon said proudly as he introduced his companion. ¡°His Reverence told him to accompany me so that he could continue healing me along the way,¡± he continued. ¡°He shall be staying with me for a year, as a kind of passage towards priesthood.¡± The two elder princes looked at Nell who stood with his veiled face bowed low. ¡°Suit yourself,¡± Prince Juno muttered before exiting the hall. It didn¡¯t take too long for the three princes to leave. Most of the congregation were busy in their chores and morning meditation, that the old high priest wasn¡¯t there to see them off. Simon had some difficulty mounting his charger, but he finally got on the horse with Nell¡¯s help. It was a good thing that the silent novice was strong enough to assist him. The retinue left immediately, with the three brothers leading the way and Nell trailing behind in his pack horse. They arrived in town about an hour later, with Simon¡¯s leg feeling worst than before. They went straight to the only hotel in town. He was glad that his brothers went to their rooms to rest while they prepared for their much longer journey home. ¡°Brother Juno, I know that we need to keep our act secret, but do you really have to give one of the royal carriages to that little worm?!¡± Largos complained as soon as the door to their room closed. ¡°And what do you expect me to do?¡± Juno glared at him. ¡°All five assassins we¡¯ve sent to kill him, have failed to report back, and yet that worm looks healthier than the day we sent him to the Dark Woods!¡± ¡°That¡¯s why we should act now and make sure he doesn¡¯t come back alive!¡± Largos insisted. ¡°Did you see he how looked after traveling on a charger? He could hardly raise himself up in those wooden sticks of his! It is obvious that he¡¯s still as weak as he has always been! I bet it was just a fluke that granted him victory! It was probably the Stone Temple priests who caught our assassins, they are well known for cultivating their own martial arts, after all.¡± This book was originally published on Royal Road. Check it out there for the real experience. ¡°And what if you¡¯re wrong?¡± Juno spat out. ¡°What if he really did receive some kind of power during his battle with the behemoth? What if he¡¯s merely baiting us, waiting for our move, that he may find some reason to justify our deaths?¡± Largos glared at his brother. ¡°I have no plan to lose my life in this backwater town in the middle of nowhere,¡± continued Juno. ¡°The best action we can take is to accompany him home. Let¡¯s weigh our options while observing him along the way. If he still seems weak and stupid, then I myself will make sure that he does not set foot on our kingdom alive.¡± ¡°Thank you for assisting me,¡± Simon told Nell as the novice priest pulled a chair out for him. ¡°I¡¯m afraid all that bumping around made my leg ache more...¡± Nell sat on a low stool, placed his left foot on his lap, and gently massaged him. The touch of his rough hands sent vibrations through his leg. It didn¡¯t take long for the pain to dissipate. ¡°I¡¯m always in awe whenever you heal me,¡± he told Nell with a thankful smile. ¡°I really owe the Stone Temple priests for saving my life.¡± Nell gave a court nod. ¡°But tell me, Nell, is Master Will really gone? Did he not leave even a message for me?¡± Nell shook his head slightly. ¡°He is my savior, if he didn¡¯t take me to town, and later, to your monastery, I would have long died together with by companions... But I couldn¡¯t even thank him properly in the end...¡± ¡°Beg your pardon, your Majesty, Prince Simon,¡± said the man, ¡°I am the mayor of this humble town, and on behalf of our people, we would like to thank you for saving us from the evil behemoth...¡± The mayor bowed low before Simon, so did the townsfolk behind him. Simon tried to stand up, but Nell was still massaging his leg. ¡°Please, raise yourselves up!¡± he said instead, feeling a bit flustered. ¡°I only did what any noble would do for his people!¡± ¡°You saved our town and our lives!¡± the townsfolk exclaimed. ¡°We owe our lives to you, and will forever pledge to you our loyalty!¡± ¡°If only all royals were as noble as you.¡± ¡°Really, it was only proper for me to do so...¡± Simon insisted. ¡°Then please, take these small gifts we have prepared for you!¡± a gruff looking man said, handing him a golden brown pelt. ¡°This is the pelt of a Weezer Sun Bear, caught in winter when its fur is the most luscious!¡± ¡°This is a 500 year old mandrake root that was found in the deepest parts of Eleanor Forest,¡± said an elderly woman who held out a foot long root crop shaped like a hairy man with two (and a half) legs. ¡°This is the specialty from my bakery!¡± said a woman in an apron. Simon tried to decline the gifts, thinking that the people of Weezer should put their wares to better use, but the townsfolk insisted. Soon, they were filling one of the royal carriages with the products they deemed worthy to give their savior. The Sun Bear pelt helped a lot to cushion the carriage seat. Simon found himself looking forward to the bumpy journey back to the Twin Kingdoms. ¡®This is quite nice...¡¯ he thought to himself as he made himself comfortable inside the carriage, ¡®I guess it isn¡¯t so bad to be called a hero after all.¡¯ ¡°Prince Simon, we are ready to embark on our journey,¡± one of his brother¡¯s knights informed him. ¡°Can I please have my healer accompany me in the carriage?¡± he asked of the knight. ¡°It would be more comfortable for him, rather than riding a pack horse all the way back to the kingdom.¡± The knight eagerly complied and brought the novice priest to the carriage. The company made the trip even more bearable, even though the novice priest didn¡¯t have much to say, or rather, didn¡¯t say anything at all.
Go to Part 14
Part 14 – The Journey Back Home ¡°Umm, Nell,¡± Simon looked at his companion with a smile, ¡°why is it that you don¡¯t speak, are you under a vow of silence?¡± he asked as the sun passed beyond the horizon. ¡°The other novices in the monastery used to talk to me, though...¡± Nell kept silent and simply nodded. ¡°Do you mind if I see your face instead?¡± he asked and was given another nod. ¡°Yes, you do mind, or yes, you can show me?¡± he asked again, grinning. Nell kept still, as if thinking, then raised his hand to pull aside the thin gray veil connected to his hooded cloak. Simon saw the unblemished face of a young lad in his early teens. His hair was cropped close to his scalp and his brows were so blond against his fair skin that they seemed non-existent. He kept his gaze low, his long blond lashes covering his gray eyes that refused to meet the gaze of the royal prince before him. ¡°It¡¯s such a pity that you need to cover such a fair face,¡± Simon said, ¡°but then again, didn¡¯t his Reverence say that as a novice priest, you would need to live as an ordinary citizens for a year? Are you not supposed to wear casual clothes to fit in with the rest of the people?¡± Nell gave a slight jolt, then slowly nodded. ¡°That¡¯s good then! I shall buy you new clothes as soon as we get to our Kingdom!¡± Simon said happily, his blue eyes shining. ¡°Good thing too, since it¡¯s a bit warmer in the Twin Kingdoms compared to the weather here in the woods, and your cloak looks so thick and rough and hot, it would surely be uncomfortable when we get there! A simple shirt or tunic would be best for you to wear! We can go to the market and explore the rest of the town, then!¡± Nell kept silent as the excited Simon told him all about his kingdom. Soon, the prince was nodding off and the carriage finally goes quiet as he fell into a comfortable sleep. ¡°How utterly disappointing,¡± Prince Juno mumbled as he looked back at the carriage his youngest brother was sharing with his healer. ¡°How could a royal prince stay in the same space as a lowly healer who has not yet even been ordained as a priest?¡± ¡°He seems to be quite good, though. Have you noticed that Simon is looking much better than when we first arrived in the inn?¡± Largos said. ¡°Also, healers are very rare and are highly valued for their talents, particularly in the capital.¡± ¡°That doesn¡¯t change the fact that he¡¯s nothing but a lowly peasant,¡± sneered Prince Juno. ¡°Well, you were the one who gave him a carriage, as well as permission to let that healer accompany him.¡± ¡°That¡¯s because we needed to win his trust. Besides, those peasants who crowded around him were already fussing about the long journey being too uncomfortable for their ¡®hero¡¯. It wouldn¡¯t do good to treat that worm as we normally do.¡± ¡°Hmph. I could do with that Sun Bear pelt right now...¡± mumbled Largos, rubbing his rump. ¡°Enough of that. Have you told the men about the little ¡®accidents¡¯ we plan to set along the way?¡± Juno gave Largos a conspiratorial look. ¡°Of course, in fact, they are planning one as we speak.¡± ¡°Good.¡± Juno gave an evil grin. ¡°Just make sure it looks like an accident, and that it actually works this time.¡± You might be reading a pirated copy. Look for the official release to support the author. Thus, the three princes¡¯ retinue suffered several ¡®accidents¡¯ on their way back to the Twin Kingdom. ¡°Look out!¡± Prince Simon snapped out of his slumber from several shouts and crashes from outside. ¡°What¡¯s going on?¡± he asked, but there was no one with him in the carriage. He drew the drapes covering the carriage¡¯s window aside and took a peep outside, where he saw Nell standing by the door. ¡°Is there a problem?¡± he asked the healer. Nell pointed up front, where a large trunk lay across the road. ¡°Prince Simon, a tree just fell inches away from our carriage,¡± the coachman informed him. ¡°It was a good thing the horses got spooked and came to a sudden halt.¡± ¡°A tree that big just suddenly fell?¡± asked Simon. ¡°We are suspecting a group of bandits uprooted it to ambush us,¡± said a bearded knight passing by. ¡°Please stay inside your carriage since you are still injured from your fight with the behemoth.¡± Simon quickly pulled the drapes shut and settled back into his comfortable seat. ¡®Bandits? How scary!¡¯ he pulled the sun bear¡¯s luscious pelt around himself. ¡®It sure was nice of my brothers¡¯ knights to look after me,¡¯ he thought to himself. ¡®They used to make fun of me back in the palace, or ignore me all together. I guess now, they think of me a bit more highly than before, since I killed the behemoth.¡¯ ¡°Is everything clear?¡± he heard one of the knights outside call out. ¡°All clear!¡± replied another. The carriage door opened then, and Nell came back to seat in his spot in front of Prince Simon. ¡°Is everything alright outside?¡± Simon asked the healer. Nell gave him a nod. ¡°Was anyone hurt this time?¡± Nell shook his head. ¡°That¡¯s good, news. It¡¯s the second fallen tree we¡¯ve encountered during our travel,¡± he mumbled, scratching his head. ¡°Do you think, perhaps, someone¡¯s doing it on purpose?¡± Nell shrugged. ¡°Yesterday, it was a sounder of boars, and the day before that, a pack of wild dogs... perhaps, the gods don¡¯t want us to get to the Twin Kingdoms?¡± Simon asked, looking anxious. Nell shook his head. ¡°I guess, you¡¯re right, I¡¯m traveling with one of god¡¯s people, after all,¡± said Simon with a nervous laugh. ¡°The trap was foiled again?¡± Juno sneered at Largos in a loud whisper. ¡°Are you sure the people you hired are real assassins?! Or are you just making me waste my money on incompetent scoundrels and swindlers?!¡± ¡°You know I only hire the best from the assassins¡¯ guild!¡± Largos retorted, sounding offended. ¡°Then why isn¡¯t a single attack from your ¡®assassins¡¯ working?!¡± ¡°They said some kind of barrier was surrounding Simon¡¯s carriage,¡± Largos explained. ¡°They tried arrows and blow darts, but they all seem to bounce off. That¡¯s why they decided to use rampaging animals and falling logs instead.¡± ¡°And still, our dear brother stays snug and comfortable inside his carriage,¡± Juno grumbled. ¡°Brother...¡± Largos sounded nervous. ¡°What if... what if the gods are keeping Simon safe?¡± he asked. ¡°Remember the stories about Emperor Jonas? How the gods favored him and kept him away from all harm by blessing him with unbelievable luck that kept all misfortune away?¡± ¡°Don¡¯t be absurd!¡± Juno sneered at him. ¡°How could you even compare that worm with the Emperor?! He was the Golden Light, the undefeated hero who put an end to the demon king in the War of Liberation twenty years ago. Our urchin of a brother could never hold a candle to him!¡± ¡°But all these coincidences... what if Simon really turns out to be the new hero?¡± Largos asked again, his fingers twitching. ¡°That¡¯s impossible,¡± Juno scoffed in reply. ¡°There can only be one Hero in existence at a time in the empire,¡± he told his brother. ¡°Everyone knows that, as well as there could only be one Saintess. So it¡¯s impossible for that worm to be a hero since the Emperor is still alive and well!¡± ¡°You have a point there...¡± Largos gave a sigh of relief. ¡°But all those thwarted attacks...¡± ¡°Just hire better assassins next time!¡± Juno snapped at him. ¡°O-okay, brother... I shall look for more competent assassins as soon as we get back to our kingdom.¡± Yet all their plans were foiled as if by some divine intervention. Soon, they finally reached the boundaries of the Twin kingdoms. The two crown princes approached Simon, and told him to lead the procession on horseback. ¡°The people of the Twin Kingdoms would want to see the face of the hero who killed the behemoth and saved them from certain disaster!¡± Prince Juno declared. ¡°It would be good for your reputation to show your face to the crowd, since hardly anyone knows who you are,¡± Prince Largos agreed. ¡°It would also be good for our soldiers¡¯ moral, since you have done nothing but hide in your carriage through out our journey back home,¡± Juno continued. ¡°Are you not feeling better yet?¡± he asked in a sarcastic tone.
CHOICES: Should Prince Simon listen to his older brothers? [He should enter the town on a charger] Go to Part 15 [He should stay in the carriage] Go to Part 16
Part 15 – Enter on a Charger They were welcomed as heroes. Simon watched in amazement as the road leading to their kingdom¡¯s main gates overflowed with people waving and throwing fresh flowers at his horses¡¯ path. ¡°Prince Simon!¡± ¡°Welcome home!¡± ¡°Our Twin Kingdom¡¯s hero has returned!¡± Simon waved from atop the charger he rode on. Earlier, his brothers told him to lead the procession with them on horseback so that the townsfolk may see him in all his glory, and he agreed to do so. ¡°I guess you¡¯re right,¡± he had replied. ¡°I feel so much better now, after all, my leg is almost completely healed, and it would be rude to our citizens if I just stayed inside the carriage.¡± Stolen from its rightful author, this tale is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings. ¡°Good,¡± said Largos. ¡°You better put your riding clothes on after you finish your breakfast. We will have a charger ready for you, we¡¯ll leave in 15 minutes.¡± And it was fabulous! Simon held his head up high, his chest out and his shoulders back, smiling at the people who were shouting his name. He raised an arm and waved at them, and the cheering became louder. ¡®I still can¡¯t believe that these people are all here for me!¡¯ thought he. ¡®Me, whom they have hardly ever heard of before, aside from being the 9th prince from the Eastern Twin!¡¯ ¡°Do you hear that, brother?¡± Largos asked from his left side. ¡°They are all amazed by your glory! You must be so proud of yourself!¡± ¡°I-I sure am!¡± said Simon, though his leg was beginning to ache. ¡°This is the happiest day of my life!¡± ¡°It could get even better!¡± said Juno on his right. ¡°Why not show the townspeople how good you are at horseback riding? Charge on before us and hurry to the castle to tell Father the good news!¡±
CHOICES: [Ride ahead] ¨C and go to Part 17 [Ride with your brothers] ¨C and go to Part 18
Part 16 – Enter Inside a Carriage They were welcomed as heroes. Simon watched in amazement as the road leading to their kingdom¡¯s main gates overflowed with people waving and throwing fresh flowers at their carriage¡¯s path. ¡°Prince Simon!¡± ¡°Welcome home!¡± ¡°Our Twin Kingdom¡¯s hero has returned!¡± Simon waved from inside the carriage he rode on. Earlier, his brothers told him to lead the procession with them on horseback so that the townsfolk may see him in all his glory, but he was reluctant to do so. ¡°T-to tell you the truth,¡± Simon told them, his face burning, ¡°m-my leg is still aching a bit, and I still find it a little inconvenient to ride on a horse with my injury...¡± ¡°Hmph... I guess your healer is not that good after all,¡± Largos mumbled. Nell lowered his head upon hearing this. ¡°No, Nell is an excellent healer!¡± Simon quickly defended his companion. ¡°I-it¡¯s just that... I don¡¯t want his efforts to go in vain... if I push myself to ride a horse too soon and injure myself again...¡± ¡°And why would the kingdom¡¯s hero get injured that easily?!¡± Largos mocked him. ¡°I-I¡¯m just being cautions... I really am not feeling that well yet...¡± Simon insisted. His two brothers gave a deep sigh. ¡°If that¡¯s what you wish, then suit yourself,¡± said Juno, sounding rather annoyed. ¡°I guess our kingdom¡¯s citizens shouldn¡¯t expect much from you after all,¡± said Largos. ¡°Hurry with your breakfast, we move again in 15 minutes.¡± ¡°Do you think they¡¯re angry at me?¡± Simon asked Nell when his royal brothers left them in their small tent. Nell shook his head. ¡°I sure hope so...¡± Simon looked down at his hands as he played with the hem of the coat he wore. ¡°We were never close as siblings, and they have always treated me as a worm...¡± Nells face rose to meet Simon¡¯s in a questioning look. The narrative has been illicitly obtained; should you discover it on Amazon, report the violation. ¡°T-they just like to play little tricks on me...¡± he told him in a solemn voice, ¡°they like to watch me slip and kick me when I fall... I¡¯m pretty clumsy after all...¡± Nell gave a sigh and shook his head. ¡°I just hope that this time... being a hero would help me get closer to my older brothers. Maybe, perhaps, they might even treat me as their equal...?¡± Nell slowly nodded, his eyes, kept shaded. ¡°Well, at least I have you as a friend now!¡± Simon told him happily. And happily, did Simon wave at the people who were shouting his name on the streets. The cheering becoming even louder as their procession led to the castle with his two brothers leading the way in their chargers. ¡°I still can¡¯t believe that all these people are here to welcome me!¡± he told Nell who sat quietly behind him. ¡°I don¡¯t think they even knew who the 9th prince from the Eastern Twin was!¡± Nell smiled at him. ¡°Oh, I can¡¯t wait to meet my father, the King! I¡¯m sure he¡¯ll be proud of me now. The last time I met him was on my mother¡¯s funeral about a year ago, and he hardly looked my way back then,¡± he went on as he continued waving at the crowd. ¡°I¡¯ll introduce you to him as well. I¡¯m sure he¡¯ll reward you dearly for healing me so well!¡± ¡°Your highness, Prince Simon, we are now at the Castle steps,¡± one of his brother Juno¡¯s knights called out to him. ¡°It is time to get off the carriage.¡± ¡°Oh, of course!¡± Simon felt embarrassed as he fumbled for the knob to open the carriage door. The knight outside offered a hand to steady him. It was good that he didn¡¯t need his clutches anymore, but he still walked with a slight limp, and the step down was a bit difficult for him. Nell touched his shoulder as he alighted the carriage, patting him on the back. ¡°Thank you, Nell, but I think I can stand on my own now,¡± Simon told the healer who stood behind him. Simon cleared his throat and looked up front. The grand staircase leading to his father¡¯s audience chamber, was lined on both sides with the king¡¯s best knights. They raised their swords in salute as he took his first step, and kept their gaze up as he passed in their midst. ¡°The 9th prince of the Eastern Twin, Prince Simon Alvin Krems seeks audience from the Eastern Twin¡¯s King Morel Jacob Krems,¡± announced a page as soon as Simon entered his father¡¯s hall. It took him a while to walk towards the throne where he sat, with his two eldest brothers already standing on either side. The room was full of people ¨C nobles close to the royal family, vassals, government officials, all of whom stared at Simon. Some had smiles upon their lips, while others, eyes full of judgment, and Simon felt himself grow smaller and smaller as he neared his father. He stopped in front of the dais where the king sat on a golden throne and bent his knee in supplication, wincing a bit as he knelt on his injured leg. ¡°My majesty and my King, I have returned from the quest you had bestowed upon me...¡± he said in a feeble voice, as was their kingdom¡¯s tradition. ¡°...I have brought you, victory!¡± Only then did the people in the chamber begin to cheer. ¡°I welcome you back, Prince Simon, my son! Come closer, that I may bless you!¡± said his father in a loud voice, giving Simon some courage to take the four steps up to where he sat.
Go to Part 19
Part 17 – Ride Ahead ¡°You¡¯re right, brother Juno!¡± Simon said with a big grin on his beaming face. ¡°I think I should do just that!¡± Saying so, Simon kicked his heels to his horse¡¯s sides and brought it to a gallop, ignoring the dull ache coming from his injured leg. He felt so exhilarated, so high in his sudden fame, that he didn¡¯t notice the suspicious smiles on the face of his two siblings. The people cheered as his horse made its way towards the castle, leaving his brothers and the rest of his procession behind. ¡®I guess the old Simon is no more,¡¯ he said happily to himself. ¡®Today, a new Simon is born! No more a loser, no longer a worm. I¡¯m now a true prince, just like my elder brothers! I am now, a Hero!¡¯ He was still thinking this, when his horse suddenly reared on its hind legs, it¡¯s flank, bleeding from a small dart wound. ¡°Oh!¡± An unsuspecting Simon gasped as he slipped off the charger¡¯s back and fell four feet to the ground, landing on his injured leg. But he didn¡¯t even get to scream in pain. The charger¡¯s huge feet fell on top of him, crushing his chest, and bringing a premature end to his new life as a fake hero.
bad ending ??
The tale has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident. Part 18 - Ride with your brothers ¡°N-no, I would rather ride with the two of you...¡± Simon said shyly. ¡°I don¡¯t think my leg could take a full gallop... in fact, it¡¯s already beginning to ache...¡± ¡°What? Just how weak are you?!¡± his brother Largos snapped at him. Simon felt his face burn. ¡°S-sorry... I guess I should have stayed in the carriage instead.¡± ¡°Think nothing of it,¡± his brother Juno said, ¡°it is enough to show the people how glorious you are.¡± He looked at Simon and gave him a sly grin. ¡°Don¡¯t you see how they adore you? You are the Twin Kingdom¡¯s savior! You¡¯re no longer a nameless prince, but a hero! You should start acting like one!¡± ¡°Y-yes, brother Juno... o-of course!¡± Simon replied, recovering his new found courage once more. At last, they reached the grand staircase leading to his fathers audience chamber. It was lined on both sides with the king¡¯s best knights. Simon was helped off his horse by his two brothers. Taken from Royal Road, this narrative should be reported if found on Amazon. The knights raised their swords in salute as the three of them entered, their gaze up as the three brothers passed in their midst. ¡°The 9th prince of the Eastern Twin, Prince Simon Alvin Krems, seeks audience from the Eastern Twin¡¯s King Morel Jacob Krems,¡± announced a page as soon as the three entered their father¡¯s hall. The room was full of people ¨C nobles close to the royal family, vassals, government officials, all of whom stared at Simon. Some had smiles upon their lips, while others, eyes full of judgment, yet Simon held on to his new found courage as he neared the throne. He stopped in front of the dais where his father, the king, sat on a golden throne and bent his knee in supplication, wincing a bit as he knelt on his injured leg. ¡°My majesty and my King, I have returned from the quest you had bestowed upon me...¡± he said in a clear voice, as was their kingdom¡¯s tradition. ¡°I have brought you, victory!¡± Only then did the people in the chamber begin to cheer. ¡°I welcome you back, Prince Simon, my son! Come closer, that I may bless you!¡± said his father in a loud voice, and Simon complied with a big grin on his face.
Go to Part 19
Part 19 – A Congratulatory Feast King Morel stood as Simon came closer and knelt in front of him once more. The king drew his sword and held the hilt in front of Prince Simon who gently kissed it. It showed the royal crest of the Krems¡¯ royal family which consists of three twigs in a pyramid, burning. ¡°Welcome back, my son! I am proud of your accomplishment, and prouder still to see you return as a hero!¡± ¡°T-thank you, father,¡± Simon beamed, his face, flushed. ¡°I¡¯m so happy that you have finally acknowledged me!¡± ¡°I always acknowledge all my children!¡± replied the king with a loud laugh. ¡°Especially you, Simon, my seventh -¡° ¡°Ninth,¡± Juno said with a small cough from his left. ¡°My ninth son!¡± the king corrected himself. ¡°Your mother must be very proud of you!¡± ¡°T-thank you, father,¡± Simon said teary-eyed, disregarding the king¡¯s blunder. ¡°I-I¡¯m sure, Mother is very happy in heaven...¡± ¡°Oh?¡± the king looked surprised. ¡°That¡¯s right, your late mother must be very proud to see how far you¡¯ve gone and how big you have grown now!¡± he said with another loud laugh. ¡°Now that we are celebrating your accomplishment, let us move to the royal dining hall for a feast befitting our hero!¡± King Morel led the way, supporting his 9th son along, while the rest of the congregation tailed behind them. They entered the dining hall, where long banquet tables were overflowing with all types of food, enough to feed a thousand guests. A case of content theft: this narrative is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation. ¡°Let everyone have their fill!¡± the king bellowed. ¡°Today we feast, for we have been spared from the terrors of the evil behemoth who dared to come near our kingdom! And we have my son, Prince Simon, to thank for this triumph!¡± ¡°Let us all raise a glass for Prince Simon¡¯s triumph!¡± cried Prince Juno. ¡°For Prince Simon¡¯s triumph!¡± all the nobles in the banquette replied. And as they ate and made merry, Simon could not help but think that this truly is the beginning of a brand new stage in his once dismal life full of woe and suffering. ¡®Maybe this time, I can truly be a prince worthy my father¡¯s attention?¡¯ he thought to himself. ¡®Perhaps now, I can be equal to my two elder brothers, and not just an insignificant worm they like to make fun of...¡¯ ¡°Why do you look like you¡¯re so deep in thought?¡± his brother Largos asked him. ¡°Put all your troubles aside and eat your full!¡± Largos filled Simon¡¯s empty cup with more wine. ¡°This feast is all for you, brother,¡± Juno told him, ¡°you should be the merriest man in this hall!¡± ¡°T-thank you brothers!¡± replied Simon as he drank his wine and ate his venison. ¡°I will do just that!¡± And he did, thinking that this was for the best. Or was it? ¡®I guess it really is best that I keep Will¡¯s secret and tell everyone that I killed the behemoth single-handedly!¡¯ thought Simon, the alcohol rising to his head. ¡®But then again, what if they ask me to prove myself as the hero?¡¯ This made Simon think.
CHOICES: ¡®What should I do, then?¡¯ [I should proudly take credit!] ¨C go to Part 20 [I should stay meek and humble.] ¨C go to Part 21
Part 20 – Proudly Take Credit! ¡®Well, I did make a promise not to tell anyone about Will,¡¯ Simon told himself. ¡®It¡¯s just right for me to take all the credit, and see what that has already brought me!¡¯ ¡°Long live his highness, prince Simon!¡± The people around him sang together with the performers his father had hired to entertain them. ¡°You are so great, brother!¡± Even the rest of his siblings noticed him for the first time. ¡°This son of mine reminds me of my youth the most!¡± proclaimed his father who hardly ever spoke to him. ¡°Tell us, Prince Simon!¡± they begged him. ¡°Tell us how you killed the behemoth!¡± So Simon drank his third cup of wine and stood from his seat and faced the crowd who stared at him wide-eyed. ¡°It was like hell on Earth!¡± he told them in a loud voice. ¡°My brothers at arms were falling, one after the other, the behemoth¡¯s fiery breath, scorching the Dark forest and leaving only ashes on its path!¡± ¡°Where were you then?¡± Juno asked. ¡°What were you doing as your companions fell?¡± ¡°I was at the back, straining from a broken leg from the behemoth¡¯s first attack...¡± Simon stared blankly before him as the scene from the carnage passed before his eyes. ¡°The two knights my brothers sent with me tried to help me... one of them brought me back to my tent, while the other stayed behind to ensure that the traps we set were armed properly to keep the monster from advancing, but the behemoth was too big for the traps, and too strong for our army... we were only 500 men strong, after all...¡± ¡°Five hundred?¡± his father the king asked him. ¡°Didn¡¯t I sent two thousand men for this quest?¡± ¡°That¡¯s right, father,¡± Juno answered quickly, ¡°I decided to divide our men into groups and send them to different locations to make sure that the behemoth would be stopped, no matter what path it would take.¡± ¡°What a brilliant plan, Prince Juno!¡± supporters of the first prince cooed. ¡°He truly is a great tactician!¡± ¡°Tell us what happened next, Simon?¡± the rest of the audience asked. ¡°We were about to reach my tent, when the behemoth attacked once more, swiping the ground with it¡¯s tail that was longer than this great hall of the royal palace! My faithful knight was able to push me aside, but he was swept away by that tail and that was the last I saw of him...¡± Simon fell silent for a while. If you encounter this narrative on Amazon, note that it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it. So did the whole dining hall. ¡°I tried to run then...¡± he confessed. ¡°I knew that I had no chance against it. All I could think of was to warn the rest about the behemoth approaching. But I was backed up against the foot of a steep cliff, and had nowhere else to go. So I decided to face him instead.¡± ¡°Then, what did you do?¡± asked one of his younger siblings, their eyes wide with anticipation. ¡°I raised my blade then and pointed it at the behemoth,¡± he continued. ¡°It stared back at me, taunting me, for it knew that there was nothing more a mere worm like me could do, until...¡± Simon paused once again. ¡°Until what?¡± asked the king, dying of anticipation with the rest of his audience. ¡°Until... I suddenly felt a burning sensation beneath my chest...¡± Simon continued with Will¡¯s story. ¡°It was a sharp, burning pain from my solar plexus that felt like my body was breaking from the inside out... as if I was about to explode! All I wanted back then was to scream and push it out of my body, so I screamed with all my might and I hurled all that feeling out and towards the monstrous behemoth that towered above me!¡± Simon looked haughtily at the people listening attentively at him. ¡°I have no idea what happened or how I did what I just did, but when I looked up, the behemoth was no more!¡± ¡°Oh! What an amazing feat indeed!¡± his audience exclaimed. ¡°It was an awakening after all!¡± the others said. ¡°Then, brother Simon,¡± Largos pipped in. ¡°Can you show us a demonstration of your newly found power?¡± he asked with a big grin on his face. Simon turned to look at him, sweat, dripping down his brows. ¡°I-I¡¯m afraid I am in no condition to do something of the sort right now...¡± he quickly answered. ¡°I guess I used too much power to kill the behemoth. I¡¯m still recuperating, and the long travel has made me weary...¡± ¡°Is that so?¡± Prince Juno asked him flatly. ¡°Yes, brothers,¡± Simon replied. ¡°And I¡¯m afraid I¡¯m not sure when this mysterious power of mine will come back again.¡± Later that evening, Simon was about to retire to the dormitory where the rest of the princes dwell, but Prince Juno intercepted him and led him towards his own dwellings. ¡°From now on, you will be given a residence of your own,¡± said his brother. ¡°Since they are still preparing a palace for you, you shall stay here for now, as my esteemed guest.¡± ¡°Thank you, brother Juno...¡± Simon answered, feeling tipsy from the wine he drank in the banquette. ¡°Please, lead the way...¡± he followed with a hiccup. They were about to leave the main palace, when someone pulled Simon¡¯s sleeve from behind. ¡°Huh? Who¡¯s there?¡± Simon asked, a bit alarmed. He looked back and saw the healer, Nell, who gave him a curt bow. ¡°Oh, Nell! There you are!¡± he called to his healer happily. ¡°Did you have a good time in the banquette? Did you watch the performances they prepared for me?¡± Nell gently shook his head. ¡°I¡¯m afraid that only nobles were allowed to enter the royal dining hall,¡± his brother Juno told him. ¡°Your healer was sent to the kitchen to eat with the rest of the aids.¡± ¡°Is that so?¡± Simon raised his brows. ¡°But Nell is my guest, he¡¯s the one who has been healing me, after all.¡± ¡°Be that as it may, he is merely an aid who has not even been ordained as a priest yet,¡± Juno insisted. ¡°You, as a member of the Krems royal family, should behave as one and not associate yourself too much with lowly peasants.¡± ¡°I-I guess you¡¯re right...¡± mumbled Simon. ¡°let¡¯s just go rest for the night,¡± he told Nell. ¡°The healer will get a room of his own together with the rest of the aids in the servants¡¯ dormitory,¡± Juno informed them. ¡°A room with the servants?¡± Simon frowned at his brother. ¡°I don¡¯t have an extra room for him,¡± Juno said coldly. ¡°Why would a lowly healer stay in the same place as his master?¡± Juno snorted and raised an eyebrow at his younger brother. Simon felt his face burn more than the alcohol he drank earlier. ¡®I guess I should start behaving like a proper royal now...¡¯ he thought to himself.
Go to Part 22
Part 21 – Stay Meek and Humble ¡®I know I made a promise to Will that I won¡¯t tell anyone what truly happened that fateful dawn,¡¯ Simon told to himself, ¡®but it won¡¯t do me good to be too proud of something I didn¡¯t actually do myself.¡¯ ¡°Long live his highness, prince Simon!¡± The people around him sang together with the performers his father had hired to entertain them. ¡°You are so great, brother!¡± Even the rest of his siblings noticed him for the first time. ¡°This son of mine reminds me of my youth the most!¡± proclaimed his father who hardly ever spoke to him. ¡°Tell us, Prince Simon!¡± they begged him. ¡°Tell us how you killed the behemoth!¡± So Simon placed his untouched cup of wine on the dining table, and stood timidly to face the crowd who stared at him wide-eyed. ¡°I-it was as if I was in the very pitts of hell itself!¡± he told them in a small, shaky voice that his audience had to strain their ears to hear. ¡°My brothers at arms were falling, one after the other... the behemoth¡¯s fiery breath, scorching the Dark forest and leaving only ashes on its path...¡± ¡°Where were you then?¡± Juno asked him mockingly. ¡°What were you doing as your companions fell one after the other?¡± ¡°I was at the back, straining from a broken leg from the behemoth¡¯s first attack...¡± Simon stared blankly before him as the scene from the carnage passed before his eyes. ¡°The two knights my brothers sent with me tried to help me... one of them brought me back to my tent, while the other stayed behind to ensure that the traps we set were armed properly to keep the monster from advancing, but the behemoth was too big for the traps, and too strong for our army... there were only 500 of us, after all...¡± ¡°Five hundred?¡± his father, the king asked him. ¡°Didn¡¯t I sent two thousand men for this quest?¡± ¡°That¡¯s right, father,¡± Juno answered quickly, ¡°I decided to divide our men into groups and sent them to different locations to make sure that the behemoth would be stopped, no matter what path it would take.¡± ¡°What a brilliant plan, Prince Juno!¡± supporters of the first prince cooed. ¡°He truly is a great tactician!¡± ¡°Tell us what happened next, Simon?¡± the rest of the audience asked. ¡°W-we were about to reach my tent, when the behemoth attacked once more, swiping the ground with it¡¯s tail... it was as long as the road from the main gates to the royal palace... M-my faithful knight was able to push me away, but... but he was swept by that accursed tail instead and was killed in an instant...¡± Simon fell silent for a while, tears streaming down his cheeks. The whole dining hall fell silent as well. Stolen from its rightful place, this narrative is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings. ¡°I tried to run then...¡± he continued. ¡°I knew that I had no chance against it. All I could think of was to warn the rest about the behemoth approaching. But I was backed up against the foot of a steep cliff, and had nowhere else to go. It was then that I decided to face the behemoth head on... though I knew I had no chance of winning...¡± ¡°Then, what did you do?¡± asked one of his younger siblings, their eyes wide with anticipation. ¡°I raised my blade then and pointed it at the behemoth,¡± he continued. ¡°He stared back at me, taunting me, for it knew that there was nothing more a mere worm like me could do, until...¡± Simon paused once again. ¡°Until what?¡± asked the king, dying of anticipation with the rest of the guests in the banquet. ¡°Until... I suddenly felt a burning sensation beneath my chest...¡± Simon continued with Will¡¯s story. ¡°I-I felt a sharp, burning pain from within my solar plexus... it felt like my body was breaking from the inside out... as if I was going to explode... A-and I just wanted to scream and push it out of my body, so I screamed with all my might and I hurled all that feeling out and towards the monstrous behemoth that towered above me.¡± He looked shyly at the people listening attentively at him. ¡°I-I have no idea what happened or how I did what I did... I just looked up after the explosion, and the behemoth was no more.¡± ¡°Oh! What an amazing feat indeed!¡± his audience exclaimed. ¡°It was an awakening after all!¡± the others said with a nod. ¡°Then, brother Simon,¡± Largos pipped in. ¡°Can you show us a demonstration of your newly found power?¡± he asked with a big grin on his face. Simon turned to look at him, his face burning. ¡°I-I¡¯m afraid I am in no condition to do something of the sort right now,¡± said he. ¡°I¡¯m still recuperating, and the long travel has made me weary... and frankly, I¡¯m not sure if I can do it again,¡± he said truthfully. ¡°Is that so?¡± Prince Juno asked him flatly. ¡°Yes, brothers,¡± Simon replied. ¡°I¡¯m afraid I¡¯m not sure when this mysterious power of mine will come back again, or if it will ever come back at all.¡± Later that evening, Simon was about retire to the dormitory where the rest of the princes lived, but Prince Juno intercepted him and led him towards his own dwellings. ¡°From now on, you will be given a residence of your own,¡± said his brother. ¡°Since they are still preparing a palace for you, you shall stay here for now, as my esteemed guest.¡± ¡°T-thank you, brother Juno...¡± Simon answered, still unfamiliar with the special treatment. ¡°P-please lead the way.¡± They were about to leave the main palace, when someone pulled Simon¡¯s sleeve from behind. He looked back and saw the healer, Nell, behind him who gave him a curt bow. ¡°Oh, Nell! There you are!¡± he called happily, glad to see his new friend. ¡°Did you have a good time in the banquet? Did you watch the performances?¡± Nell gently shook his head. ¡°I¡¯m afraid that only nobles were allowed to enter the royal dining hall,¡± his brother Juno told him. ¡°Your healer was sent to the kitchen to eat with the rest of the aids.¡± ¡°I-is that so?¡± Simon frowned at his brother. ¡°But Nell is my friend, and should be treated as an honorable guest. He¡¯s the one who has been healing me, after all.¡± ¡°Be that as it may, he is merely an aid who has not even been ordained as a priest yet,¡± Juno insisted. ¡°You, as a member of the Krems royal family, should behave as one and not associate yourself too much with lowly peasants.¡± ¡°But...¡± Simon was about to argue with his brother some more, but Nell gently touched his shoulder and shook his head. ¡°See?¡± Juno said with a snort, ¡°even your aid knows his place.¡± ¡°I-I guess you¡¯re right then...¡± said Simon. ¡°let¡¯s just go to my brother¡¯s palace to rest for the night,¡± he told Nell. ¡°The healer will get a room of his own together with the rest of the servants,¡± Juno told them coldly. ¡°A room with the servants?¡± Simon frowned at his brother once more. ¡°But Nell is my personal healer! He should have a room next to mine!¡± he protested. ¡°I¡¯m afraid I don¡¯t have an extra room for him,¡± Juno said coldly. ¡°But if you insist, he can stay in the servants¡¯ quarters in my palace instead.¡± ¡°He can just stay in my room with me...¡± ¡°A lowly healer in the same room as royalty?¡± Juno snorted and raised an eyebrow at his younger brother. Simon felt his face burn more than the alcohol he tasted earlier. ¡®I guess I should start behaving like a proper royal now...¡¯ he thought to himself.
CHOICES: [I should do what a proper royal should do.] ¨C go to Part 22 [I still wish for Nell to stay by my side.] ¨C go to Part 23
Part 22 – A Proper Royal ¡°You¡¯re right, brother Juno, I should let Nell stay with the other aids and servants,¡± said Simon with a sigh. He faced the healer with an apologetic smile. ¡°I hope you don¡¯t mind, Nell, I¡¯ll just call for you tomorrow for the rest of our healing sessions.¡± Nell nodded at Simon, then turned around and walked away. Juno then faced one of the aids trailing behind them and harrumphed. ¡°Show my brother, Prince Simon, his room in my palace,¡± he told a young looking gentleman. ¡°Yes, your highness, Prince Juno,¡± replied the manservant. ¡°This way, your highness, Prince Simon.¡± The manservant introduced himself as Rode. ¡°I shall be your butler as long as you stay in Prince Juno¡¯s palace. Please tell me if there is anything you need.¡± ¡°Thank you, Rode,¡± Simon replied with a grin. ¡°You can leave now, I would like to get some resst.¡± ¡°Do you not wish to clean yourself first before you retire for the night, your highness?¡± Rode asked. ¡°Oh, that would be nice.¡± ¡°Then I shall call for the servants to prepare you a bath,¡± said Rode before leaving the room. ¡°Woah, I get a butler and servants to bathe me!¡± Simon said with a small laugh. ¡°Back in the old dormitory where I used to stay with the rest of the insignificant princes, we don¡¯t have servants of our own, and we can only bath in the day time, in the common bathroom on the ground floor!¡± This story originates from a different website. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there. He looked around the spacious room he currently occupied and sighed in contentment. ¡°All of these still seem like a dream!¡± He laughed merry as he dropped face first on the feathery soft canopy bed. ¡°I hope I never wake!¡± That night, the two eldest princes met to weigh their options. ¡°What do you think, brother Juno?¡± asked Largos. ¡°Should we still get rid of that worm?¡± ¡°Not for now,¡± replied Juno. ¡°Tell me first, what happened to that sniper you employed for the parade earlier?¡± ¡°Well...¡± Largos kept his gaze low, ¡°according to him, he shot Simon with a poisoned dart three times as soon as he alighted on the castle steps, but the darts he aimed at him just bounced off, as if an invisible bowl was covering him.¡± ¡°Again?¡± Juno frowned at his brother. ¡°I¡¯m telling you, brother Juno, there really is something about that Simon that disturbs me. Some higher beings must truly be guarding him!¡± ¡°And I say, it was just that healing priest and his little tricks!¡± Juno replied. ¡°It was probably a buff or a blessing of some sort to keep him safe. That¡¯s why I have decided to separate the two.¡± ¡°Will it be easier to get rid of him then?¡± asked Largos. ¡°Of course!¡± Juno said with an evil grin. ¡°But then again, what¡¯s the rush?¡± ¡°What do you mean?¡± ¡°Did you not see how our little brother the ¡®hero¡¯ got drunk, not only from the wine, but from his accomplishments as well?¡± ¡°Yeah, I was getting pissed by the way he kept blabbering about how his ¡®solar plexus¡¯ wanting to ¡®explode¡¯, when he can¡¯t even show us any proof that he could actually kill anything bigger than a fly!¡± ¡°Why don¡¯t we let him have his fill, then?¡± Juno sneered. ¡°Let him wallow in the limelight while we spread lies about his conquest, and when he least expects it, we shall expose him as a phony, a deceiving little worm that befits his image.¡± ¡°Oh, brother Juno, you truly are a great strategist! Your plans always excite me!¡± ¡°But of course, as befits a crown prince and the future king!¡± Juno smiled confidently while his brother¡¯s grin looked strained. ¡°For now, let¡¯s help Simon tell more tall tales about his fight with the behemoth,¡± he continued with an evil grin, ¡°let his mouth be his own undoing, and when he goes too far, we will be there to push him over and roll him in the mud like the slimy worm he is.¡±
Go to Part 24
Part 23 – Keep Nell by my side ¡°I-I¡¯m afraid I can¡¯t do that, brother Juno,¡± said Simon, feeling a bit bolder with the little bit of alcohol he drank in the banquet. ¡°Nell is not merely a healer to me, he is my friend, and a companion the Stone Temple High Priest left in my protection! How can I treat him as just another servant in the castle?¡± ¡°W-well, it is just a suggestion, after all,¡± said Juno who quickly took back his words. ¡°If you plan to be a respectable noble, and a part of the royal family, you should learn to discern who is high borne from the low.¡± ¡°B-but I prefer to treat people equally, brother,¡± said Simon, ¡°particularly when they are friends who have done me favors I can¡¯t just repay. I owe him my life, after all.¡± Juno glared at his younger brother. Simon looked back at him, his eyes clear, though his face looked flushed with the rush of talking back to his older brother. ¡°Hmph. Suit yourself, then.¡± He faced one of the aids trailing behind them and harrumphed. ¡°Show my brother, Prince Simon, his room in my palace,¡± he told a young looking gentleman. ¡°Let him take his healer to the room with him.¡± ¡°Yes, your highness, Prince Juno,¡± replied the manservant. ¡°This way, your highness, Prince Simon,¡± he said, facing the two guests. The manservant introduced himself as Rode. ¡°I shall be your butler as long as you stay in Prince Juno¡¯s palace. Please tell me if there is anything you need.¡± ¡°Thank you, Rode,¡± Simon replied with a grin. ¡°You may leave us, I would like to rest now.¡± ¡°Do you not wish to clean yourself first before you retire for the night, your highness?¡± Rode asked. ¡°Oh, I do, but...¡± ¡°Then I shall call for the servants to prepare you a bath,¡± said Rode before leaving the room. Love this story? Find the genuine version on the author''s preferred platform and support their work! ¡°Woah, I get a butler and servants to bathe me!¡± Simon said with a small laugh. ¡°Back in the old dormitory where I used to stay with the rest of the insignificant princes, we don¡¯t have servants of our own, and we can only take a bath in the day time, in the common bathroom on the ground floor!¡± He looked at Nell who simply nodded at him. ¡°Oh, Nell, I¡¯m telling you, all of these still seem like such a dream to me! And best of all, is that I¡¯m sharing it with you! My very first friend!¡± he gave a merry laugh as he dropped face first on the feathery soft canopy bed. ¡°I hope you have a lot of fun here as well, Nell!¡± Again, the healer gave another nod. ¡°Hmm...¡± Simon frowned at his friend. ¡°Let¡¯s see now...¡± He went to a long desk at the corner of the room and rummaged through its drawers. ¡°Perfect! Just what I was looking for!¡± He went back to the bed where Nell was standing, and handed him some paper and a quill pen. ¡°Here! Now, we can talk properly!¡± Nell stared at the pen and paper. ¡°Go, on, take it!¡± Nell shook his head. ¡°What¡¯s the matter? Does your vow of silence include words in writing?¡± Nell shook his head once more. ¡°Oh... don¡¯t you know how to read and write?¡± This time, Nell gave him a nod. ¡°Oh, I just thought that since the priests copy scriptures, then... well, it doesn¡¯t matter, I would just need to teach you!¡± said Simon. ¡°Anyway, is there anything you want to know about me or this place?¡± he asked Nell once more. ¡°You can use signs and gestures if you like.¡± Nell stared at him, gave a sigh, and took the paper. There, he drew a picture of a frowning man with straight hair that fell to his shoulders. ¡°Oh, what a nice drawing! Is that my brother Juno?¡± Simon asked with a grin. Nell nodded and then proceeded to draw an ¡®X¡¯ next to the image. ¡°Huh?¡± He then drew another image, this time, the face was rounder, and hair shorter, like a bowl around its head. ¡°Oh, it¡¯s brother Largos!¡± Nell drew another ¡®X¡¯ beside that drawing as well. ¡°You¡¯re good at drawing!¡± Simon laughed. Nell pointed at the two drawings. ¡°Ah... do you mean... you don¡¯t like my two brothers?¡± he asked his friend. Nell nodded, then shook his head, and draw bigger ¡®X¡¯s over the two faces he drew. Then he pointed at Simon and shook his head again. ¡°Are you saying I shouldn¡¯t like them too?¡± Nell moves his hand in a rolling motion. ¡°Or... you don¡¯t want me to... trust them?¡± Now, Nell nods his head repetitively. ¡°Well, I guess those two are not really that trustworthy...¡± Simon said with a sad sigh. ¡°But I would like to think that I could still count on them, even just for a bit. We are siblings after all...¡± Nell was about to draw something more, when they heard a knock on the door. ¡°Your bath has been prepared, your highness,¡± said Rode with a bow. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Nell,¡± Simon assured him, ¡°everything will be just fine!¡± and he left the room with the butler, leaving Nell behind who gave a deep sigh.
Go to Part 24
Part 24 – Nobility ¡°For this day¡¯s schedule, you shall be accepting audiences from nobility. They have come to give you presents and to show you their support,¡± Rode, the butler, told Simon as his new attendants dressed him up for the day. ¡°Your younger brothers also wanted to meet you, but you need to meet with members of nobility first...¡± ¡°But aren¡¯t my brothers royalty?¡± Simon asked, frowning at Rode. ¡°That is correct,¡± answered the butler, ¡°but as you are well aware of, princes who are not in the direct line of succession, are only considered as mere nobles without titles.¡± ¡°Oh...¡± Simon said thoughtfully. ¡°When can I meet them, then?¡± ¡°I can not answer since the schedule for the visit of nobility is still being attended to. The earliest would be next week.¡± ¡°Oh...¡± Simon replied once more. ¡°Ahem... as I was saying,¡± Rode continued, ¡°your first visitor would be Duke Fann and his family, followed by Earl Summers and his daughter June, then you shall be attending lunch with his royal highness the King, and have tea with the Countess Ruby and her family with...¡± ¡°Can¡¯t I meet my brothers tomorrow?¡± said Simon, interrupting the butler. ¡°Tomorrow, you are to visit your royal father¡¯s twin brother, his royal highness King Maurice Jobert Krems, in the West Kingdom.¡± ¡°Oh... then, is Father coming with me?¡± he asked Rode. ¡°His royal highness will be busy with other things,¡± the butler replied. ¡°Your two brothers, Prince Juno and Prince Largos will be joining you instead.¡± Simon looked disappointed. The attendants finally finished dressing him up. He looked at the full length mirror in his room and admired how sharp he looked in the blue double vested suit. They even placed a cloak on him, fastened with a thick gold chain with the Krems family crest of three twigs burning in a pyramid. ¡®I can¡¯t believe this is really me!¡¯ he thought as he stared at the golden haired boy with the wide blue eyes. ¡®Can I really change myself this time?¡¯ he asked himself. ¡®Can I really be a hero?¡¯ ¡°Shall we leave now, your highness?¡± Rode called to him. ¡°Oh, not yet, I still have a healing session with Nell,¡± he answered back. Upon the mention of his name, Nell stepped forward from the group of attendants and gave a curt bow. ¡°Then I shall wait outside. Please call for me as soon as your session is over.¡± Nell approached Simon as Rode left the room. Simon reached a hand to him as he sat on an armchair. Nell held his hand, palm down on his, which he covered with his other hand. Soon, a light blue glow emitted from the healer¡¯s hands, signaling the start of the healing session. If you encounter this story on Amazon, note that it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it. ¡°I¡¯m feeling so much better now, Nell!¡± Simon told the healer happily. ¡°My leg hardly aches anymore, and I feel so much stronger than I have ever felt before!¡± Nell nodded his veiled head. ¡°In fact, I feel so strong that I think that I could actually kill a behemoth!¡± he said with a laugh. Nell paused and tilted his head. ¡°I-I mean... I think I could kill another one!¡± Simon corrected himself with a nervous laugh. ¡°And I have you to thank for that, Nell! You really are such a great healer, that I know I would be ready to face anything that comes my way!¡± Nell kept silent as usual. ¡°So, how was your first stay in the Eastern Twin Kingdom? Did you sleep well? Did you have a good breakfast?¡± Nell nodded. ¡°That¡¯s great to hear! After this session, I¡¯ll give you some new clothes and other stuff you could use during your stay here, as I had promised!¡± Nell shook his head. ¡°Oh, but I insist!¡± he said happily, when he suddenly remembered his brother Prince Juno¡¯s words. ¡°Ah, but my brothers would probably get angry with me again...¡± he mumbled, looking glum. ¡°You see, Nell, here in the Twin kingdoms, there¡¯s a tradition where only the two eldest princes are treated well in the reigning royal family,¡± Simon explained. ¡°This has been so, since our ancestors usually have twins, thus, the kingdom is divided into the East and the West kingdom.¡± ¡°According to tradition, the king who bears a twin son, shall have his two sons rule both the East and West parts of the kingdom,¡± Simon continued, ¡°but since my father, King Morel Jacob Krems of the East and my uncle, King Maurice Jobert Krems of the West, both failed to produce twins, then their first born sons will be taking their place instead.¡± Nell tilted his head in question. ¡°I know, it sounds complicated, doesn¡¯t it?¡± he said with a little laugh. ¡°It is actually because of an old prophesy from a priest that dated back to our first ancestors. He said that as long as twins sit on the throne, then no harm will befall our East and West kingdoms. Even the current kings are twins, and they say that this was the reason why the Great War of Liberation didn¡¯t even reach our boundaries.¡± ¡°I mean, we are just a small insignificant kingdom in the middle of nowhere. We are located farthest from the empire¡¯s capital, but even so, we were the only place that wasn¡¯t affected by the war at all!¡± Simon looked at the healer proudly. ¡°Don¡¯t you think that¡¯s really something?¡± Nell slowly nodded his head in understanding. ¡°You see, that¡¯s why the two kings have lots of children, it¡¯s so they can get twin princes to take their place in the future,¡± Simon went on. ¡°Sadly, there have only been a pair of twin princesses from the West, and we all know that women can¡¯t hold power,¡± he shook his head sadly. ¡°Do you know that only the two eldest princes, are given their own palace?¡± Simon went on. ¡°It¡¯s to ensure that at least one would grow up fit to be a king, in case twins are not born in either royal families. The rest of us live in a separate place, much likened to a dormitory, where we are treated no different from lowly nobles... aside from basic education, food and clothing, we aren¡¯t even given the privileged to roam around the main palace without permission. Most of my older brothers like to pick on us younger ones, too,¡± he added with a pout. ¡°But we¡¯re still quite lucky, compared to our sisters who are sent to a convent to train for future marriage exchanges as soon as they can walk.¡± Nell looked at him, brows raised. ¡°I know, the laws here are quite old fashioned,¡± Simon said with a shrug. ¡°I heard they allowed women to hold positions in government in the capital when the war ended. Do you think that¡¯s true?¡± he asked the novice priest who shrugged back at him. ¡°But anyway...¡± Simon gave a deep breath and stared at Nell whose honey brown eyes were partly covered by long lashes so blond that they were almost white. ¡°Nell, do you think I could actually change myself to be a hero worthy of my name?¡± He asked the healer. Nell looked at him and gave a small smile. ¡°Thank you Nell,¡± Simon smiled back. ¡°I knew you would understand me. From now on...¡±
CHOICES: [I shall try my best to be a worthy companion to you.] go to Part 25 [I¡¯ll show you what a hero can do!] go to Part 26
PART 25 – A Proud Resolve ¡°From now on, I¡¯ll do my best to be the hero people expect me to be.¡± Nell bowed his head in reply to Prince Simon¡¯s vow. The light emitted from his hands dissipated, as the healing session came to an end. ¡°Are we done now?¡± Nell nodded, his head kept bowed. ¡°Thank you, Nell, I better inform Rode about my plans, then.¡± Simon stood from his seat and was surprised that the ache on his left leg was completely gone! ¡°Wow, Nell, my leg feels as good as new!¡± he said happily. ¡°You really are a great healer!¡± He took hold of Nell¡¯s hand and shook it. ¡°Now, I can really show everyone that I have changed for the better!¡± Simon went to the door and opened it. Rode was waiting just outside. ¡°Shall we go to your first appointment now, your highness?¡± he asked Simon. ¡°Of course, Rode,¡± Simon said with a big smile. ¡°Where should we head to for now?¡± ¡°We are to meet Duke Fann and his family in the north garden for some morning tea. I was told that Earl Summers had arrived earlier than expected and have decided to join us as well.¡± ¡°Okay, then, please lead the way,¡± Simon replied, hoping that he sounded like a proper prince. He had decided to act like a true noble, after all, just as his brother Juno had told him to. ¡°Also,¡± he added as they went on their way, ¡°please tell the servants to take all my belongings from my former room and give the still useful ones to my healer Nell.¡± He looked at Nell and smiled. ¡°I know that they might not be that much, but I hope they can be of use to you for now.¡± He faced Rode once more. ¡°I was also told that a palace will be prepared for me?¡± ¡°Yes, your highness, you can move there this evening,¡± the butler replied. ¡°Then please send the things there instead. Nell can have a room with the rest of my new attendants.¡± ¡°As you request, your highness,¡± Rode replied with a slight bow. Simon was ushered to the North Garden which is often used to entertain guests from nobility. A large pergola could be seen in the middle, surrounded by flowering bushes. The main path leading to it was covered in climbing roses. The sweet scent of the delicate flowers surrounded him as he made his way to the center. ¡°This place is so enchanting!¡± Simon said with a small, childish laugh. ¡°This is the first time I¡¯ve been here, or anywhere else in the main palace, for that matter.¡± Rode kept silent, as a butler was expected to. He stepped to a side when they reached the covered sitting area and announced Simon¡¯s arrival. ¡°His highness, Prince Simon, 9th prince of the Eastern Twin Kingdom, has arrived.¡± Simon looked at the people gathered around a circular marble table. They stood in reverence as he entered, and gently lowered their heads. ¡°These are Duke Fann and the Duchess Desal, with their children, Princess Tina and Princess Fay,¡± said Rode, addressing the two princesses who stood at either side of their bulky middle-aged father. ¡°And these are Earl Summers with his daughter Lady June,¡± the butler added. Compared to the elderly Duke, the slim looking Earl Summers looked quite the academic with his silver spectacles and sleek black hair, so did his daughter who wore a simple moss green dress with her black hair tied in a neat bun. ¡°It is a pleasure to meet you, your highness, Prince Simon,¡± they all greeted him. ¡°The pleasure is all mine,¡± said Simon with a curt bow. It was a good thing that he hasn¡¯t forgotten the basic etiquette lessons they were taught as kids. Rode pulled out a seat for Simon, between Duke Fann¡¯s older daughter Tina, and Earl Summers¡¯ daughter June. Both ladies looked much older than him. ¡°I had no idea his highness looks so handsome up close!¡± Duchess Desal cooed. ¡°You look so nice sitting next to our lovely Tina!¡± Simon looked at the Duchess, then at her daughter who seemed to be in her mid-twenties. She has straight brown hair and green eyes like her father. ¡°I thank you for the compliment, your daughter truly is lovely,¡± he replied with a shy smile. Reading on Amazon or a pirate site? This novel is from Royal Road. Support the author by reading it there. ¡°Ah, but don¡¯t you think my June suits you better?¡± Earl Summers piped in, ¡°She just turned seventeen last month, she would make a good conversation partner since she is closer to your age.¡± The duke harrumphed. ¡°Well, if he is looking for someone closer to his age, then he might as well choose our little Fay who just turned thirteen this month! She is being educated in the prestigious Convent of the Blue Dove, where the Empress Mother graduated herself!¡± ¡°Well, my June came from the Convent of the Lilac Rose, which is famous for instructing princesses in the ways of art, beauty, and grace!¡± Earl Summers said coldly. ¡°Oh, my mother came from that convent as well!¡± said Simon, glad to be part of the conversation. ¡°I see, your highness, then would it not be great if you chose my June as your future companion!¡± Earl Summers said triumphantly. ¡°A companion?¡± Simon asked with a questioning look on his face. ¡°Well, I guess it would be nice to have a companion to talk to and study with.¡± Simon smiled at the nobles seated around him. He noticed that they all looked confused. It was only June who stared at him with a hint of interest in her deep blue eyes. ¡°Ah, your highness,¡± Earl Summers cleared his throat. ¡°You seem to have misunderstood us...¡± ¡°Your highness, when we say ¡®companion¡¯, we did not mean someone who would merely ¡®accompany¡¯ you,¡± the duchess laughed. ¡°We meant someone who would stay by your side,¡± continued her husband. ¡°Both in your work, and in your bed.¡± ¡°In my bed?¡± Simon¡¯s forehead creased. ¡°Why would we work in my be¨C¡± The duke¡¯s words finally seeped in. Simon¡¯s face turned bright red. ¡°M-my goodness!¡± he muttered, covering his face in embarrassment. The duchess¡¯ laughter got louder, while the princesses kept their composure, their eyes, low, their lips pursed, except for princess June whose eyes kept staring at Simon. ¡°I-I¡¯m afraid I-m still t-too young to think of m-marriage proposals!¡± he stuttered. ¡°S-shouldn¡¯t you be asking my father about that instead?¡± ¡°Your highness, there¡¯s no reason to be flustered,¡± said Earl Summers, ¡°this is merely a small meeting for you to be acquainted to our daughters!¡± ¡°Please don¡¯t mind my husband¡¯s straightforward words,¡± said the Duchess. ¡°We just wish to show our appreciation to your heroic deed of ridding our Twin Kingdoms of the threat of the behemoth.¡± ¡°That is right, your highness,¡± the Earl smiled at Simon. ¡°We are here to show you that we are ready to support you in any way we can. Thus, we wish that you will consider our daughters in the future.¡± ¡°That is correct, your highness,¡± the duke spoke once more. ¡°But if you wish, we can let you marry our youngest right now, you can just consummate your wedding vows when you feel like it!¡± he said with a sleazy grin which made Simon¡¯s face burn up even more. ¡°Ugh, Duke Fann! You and your vulgar thoughts!¡± Earl Summers said, shaking his head. ¡°And you, Earl Summers, are still as stiff as the spine of the books you love to read! I¡¯m sure your daughter would make a fine librarian instead!¡± Simon watched as the two fathers bickered with each other. In their lessons in politics, he learned that Duke Fann is a high ranking general in the royal army, while Earl Summers was the head of finance in the Eastern Twin Kingdom. They were both quite influential, that¡¯s why he couldn¡¯t understand why the two were trying to wed their daughters to him. The two kept bickering until the Butler cleared his throat. ¡°Your highness, Prince Simon, it is about time for you to meet his Majesty, your father, king Morel, in the dining hall.¡± ¡°Ah, then please excuse me, Duke Fann, Earl Summers,¡± Simon quickly said, ¡°I¡¯m afraid I need to leave first.¡± ¡°Ah, then please think of my June when you choose a companion,¡± said Earl Summers as he stood up from the table. ¡°Why bother, when he can wed them all?¡± Duke Fann mumbled, which earned him a jab from his wife. ¡°Dear, you know well that only the crown prince has the right to have concubines,¡± she said with a forced smile. ¡°Well, I won¡¯t be surprised if we get a new candidate for the crown prince position soon!¡± Duke Fann announced with a laugh. He went to Simon¡¯s side as the young prince was about to leave and clapped him on the back, sending him off balanced. ¡°Just don¡¯t forget our Tina and young Fay when your father recognizes your worth!¡± he said with a grin. ¡°I-I shall do just that,¡± replied Simon with a nervous laugh. Dining with the King wasn¡¯t any better. Simon¡¯s father, King Morel was already seated at the end of the long banquette table when Simon arrived. His older brothers, Prince Juno and Prince Largos, were both seated to his left, while the place of honor to his right was vacant. Rode pulled the chair to the king¡¯s right hand and waited for Simon to take his place. ¡°I-I¡¯m sorry for being late, I had a previous engagement with Duke Fann and Earl Summers...¡± Simon tried to explain. ¡°Yes, we are well aware of your schedule,¡± answered Prince Juno who slightly gazed at Rode. ¡°So, have you met their daughters?¡± ¡°T-their daughters...?¡± Simon said awkwardly while the servants brought out one platter of food after another. ¡°Yes, my son,¡± the King answered as they began to eat. ¡°It is important for you to be acquainted with a lady of your choosing. You are, after all, being considered as a crown prince candidate.¡± Simon began to choke on the piece of toast he was nibbling. ¡°C-crown prince?!¡± he managed to croak out. His eyes fell on his two older brothers. They didn¡¯t seem to be affected by this news. ¡°Of course,¡± their father continued. ¡°You are this country¡¯s savior! It is just right to offer you a chance to be the future king!¡± he declared with pride. ¡°B-but... what about brother Juno and brother Largos?¡± Simon asked. ¡°As it has been in the past, when there are no twins in either the East and the West kingdoms, the royal family would train the two first born princes as candidates for the crown prince position,¡± explained Juno. ¡°Should something happen to me, then Largos shall take my place,¡± he continued, ¡°but both of us have always been ready to step down, in case twins are born to the Twin Kingdoms.¡± ¡°As it is, it is my honor to step down to make way to a more... fitting... candidate,¡± Largos finished through gritted teeth. ¡°B-but...¡± Simon was about to argue some more, when he paused to think. ¡®Wait a minute, why do I sound like I dislike being a crown prince?¡¯ he thought to himself. ¡®Once I become the leading candidate, I can enjoy the same privileges brother Juno and brother Largos have! I could live in splendor in a palace, and have royal knights and servants under my command! And isn¡¯t it just right for me to be treated as the Hero I am?¡¯ ¡®I mean... I may not be the one who actually killed the Behemoth, but I was in that battle, and I almost died that day, while my two brothers were lazing around safely, miles away from the Dark Forest.¡¯
CHOICES: [Should I decline the offer?] go to Part 27 [Should I accept it graciously?] go to Part 28
PART 26 – A Meek Resolve ¡°From now on, I shall try to be worthy of my title.¡± Nell bowed his head in reply to Prince Simon¡¯s vow. The light emitted from his hands dissipated, as the healing session came to an end. ¡°Are we done now?¡± Nell nodded, his head kept bowed. ¡°Thank you, Nell, I better inform Rode about my plans, then.¡± Simon stood up from his seat and was surprised that the ache on his left leg was now completely gone! ¡°Wow, Nell, my leg feels as good as new!¡± he said happily. ¡°You really are a marvelous healer!¡± He took hold of Nell¡¯s hand and shook it before heading for the door. Rode was waiting just outside. ¡°Shall we go to your first appointment now, your highness?¡± he asked Simon. ¡°Change of plans, Rode,¡± Simon said with a big smile. ¡°I have decided that I wanted to meet with my brothers first!¡± ¡°Excuse me?¡± Rode looked at him with a frown. ¡°I need to get my things from my old room, and I should visit my brothers as long as I¡¯m there, so can you please move my schedule?¡± ¡°But your highness¨C¡° ¡°I¡¯ll be counting on you then!¡± Simon told the butler cheerfully. Said butler¡¯s jaw dropped as Simon left the room, dragging Nell behind him. ¡°Let me introduce you to my brothers!¡± he told the healer. ¡°My younger brothers aren¡¯t as bad as my older ones, especially the kids, they¡¯re still too young to be vicious, and I try my best to keep them that way by keeping our elder brothers away from them,¡± he kept chattering. Nell tried to pull away, but Simon kept on talking. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, since you¡¯re my dear friend, I won¡¯t let my brothers bully you. I¡¯ll keep you next to me and make sure you are treated as the special guest you are ¨C you¡¯re an envoy from the Stone Temple, after all,¡± he went on. ¡°I was told that they have prepared a palace for me, and that it would be ready by tonight, I shall have you stay in a room closest to mine, and make sure you have everything you need to live comfortably for the year to come.¡± They walked for a while. Simon, kept telling Nell all about the Eastern Twin kingdom. Finally, they reached the palace of the princes. It was a long, two story building made of red bricks with a wide lawn in front where the older princes were taught swordsmanship. Several princes were there at the moment when Simon arrived, and they all flocked to him once they saw him. ¡°Brother Simon!¡± they called. ¡°Thank you for visiting us!¡± ¡°We were so worried about you!¡± ¡°We¡¯re so glad that you came back alive¡± Simon¡¯s smile looked a bit strained. He was glad that they were happy to see him, but at the same time, he couldn¡¯t help but remember that these were the same older brothers who used to make fun of him every day. He still remembers how they laughed at him when he was tasked to lead the first attack on the behemoth. ¡®It¡¯s just right for the most useless brother to meet the monster first!¡¯ they had said. Stolen from Royal Road, this story should be reported if encountered on Amazon. ¡®He¡¯s nothing but monster fodder.¡¯ ¡®Just make sure you set all the traps properly, or are you too incompetent to do even that?¡¯ ¡°Thank you, brothers, but I can¡¯t stay here for too long,¡± he told the other princes. ¡°I¡¯m just here to take my personal belongings from my room, I¡¯ll stay longer next time.¡± He looked back at the servants following him. Rode told them to accompany him and carrying his belongings to his new residence. Not that he had much to carry. They were probably sent with him to make sure that he comes back in time to have lunch with his father the king. Simon entered the building and made his way to his room on the second floor where he met two kids along the way. ¡°Brother Simon!¡± ¡°Chris! Urr! How have you been?¡± Simon called to them fondly. ¡°We¡¯re doing okay, we¡¯re just sad that we weren¡¯t allowed to greet you yesterday!¡± said Chris. ¡°That¡¯s because only those aged 14 and above are allowed to enter the royal dining hall,¡± Simon told them. ¡°You¡¯re turning 14 this year, right, Urr?¡± ¡°Yes, brother, and I plan to be sent to a glorious mission as soon as I turn of age, just like you!¡± he told Simon proudly. ¡°Ah, I think it would be too early for that,¡± Simon said with a sigh. ¡°I had no choice since the threat of the behemoth suddenly came, but if I were to choose, I would want all of you to just train and get deployed when you¡¯re old enough to lift a bastard sword properly!¡± ¡°And when would that be?¡± Chris and Urr said in unison, frowning at their brother. ¡°Hmm, perhaps when you¡¯re 30?¡± Simon said with a laugh. Nell watched as Simon joked around with his brothers. Soon, more young princes arrived to greet and welcome them as they made their way to Simon¡¯s old room. It was the first and probably, the only time he will see the young prince smile and laugh wholeheartedly. Simon stayed there for a while. He gave most of his old belongings to his younger brothers, putting some of the clothes aside for Nell. ¡°Now remember,¡± he said facing Chris and Urr once the items were packed and distributed. ¡°The two of you are now the eldest of the kids here, please take good care of the little ones and make sure they don¡¯t end up like our older brothers.¡± ¡°You can count on us!¡± said Urr. ¡°We¡¯re never going to end up like our bully brothers!¡± said the smaller ones. ¡°Yeah! We want to be a hero just like you, brother Simon!¡± they told him. ¡°Then I shall try my best to be a hero you can all be proud of,¡± said Simon with a gentle smile. ¡°Your highness...¡± Simon looked at the doorway and saw Rode standing there with a frown on his face. ¡°It is time for you to dine with his majesty.¡± He looked irritated. ¡°Coming.¡± He faced his brothers one last time and gave them all a tight hug. ¡°Just send me a message if you need me,¡± he told them as he gave his farewells. King Morel was already seated at the end of the long banquette table when Simon arrived. His older brothers, Prince Juno and Prince Largos, were both seated to his left, while the place of honor to his right was vacant. Both of them looked annoyingly at Simon as he entered the room. Rode pulled the chair to the king¡¯s right hand and waited for Simon to take his place. ¡°Took you long enough to get here...¡± he heard his brother Largos mumble. Simon felt his face burn as he he took his seat. ¡°I-I¡¯m sorry... I had decided to meet with the rest of our brothers, since they requested for me to meet them...¡± Simon explain. ¡°Yes, we were aware of how you canceled your appointment with Duke Fann and Earl Summers,¡± Prince Juno said coldly. ¡°Make sure you meet with them this afternoon to get acquainted with their daughters. ¡°T-their daughters...?¡± Simon asked as the servants brought out their food. ¡°Yes, my son,¡± the King answered as they began to eat. ¡°It is important for you to be acquainted with a lady of your choosing. You are, after all, being considered now as a crown prince candidate.¡± Simon began to choke on a piece of toast he was nibbling. ¡°C-crown prince?!¡± he managed to croak out. His eyes fell on his two older brothers. They didn¡¯t seem to be affected with the news, as much as they were pissed that he was late for lunch. ¡°Of course,¡± their father continued. ¡°You are this country¡¯s savior! It is just right to offer you a chance to be the future king!¡± he declared with pride. ¡°B-but... what about brother Juno and brother Largos?¡± Simon asked. ¡°As it has been in the past, when there are no twins in either the East and the West kingdoms, the royal family would train the two first born princes as candidates for the crown prince position,¡± explained Juno. ¡°Should something happen to me, then Largos shall take my place,¡± he continued, ¡°but both of us have always been ready to step down, in case twins are born to the either of the Twin Kingdoms.¡± ¡°As it is, it is my honor to step down to make way to a more... fitting... candidate,¡± Largos finished through gritted teeth. ¡°B-but...¡± Simon was about to argue some more, when he paused to think. ¡®Wait a minute, why do I sound like I dislike being a crown prince?¡¯ he thought to himself. ¡®Once I become the leading candidate, I can enjoy the same privileges brother Juno and brother Largos have! I could live in splendor in a palace, and have royal knights and servants under my command!¡¯ He was still contemplating this when a frightening thought entered his mind. ¡®But what if they realize that I don¡¯t have any special powers within me?¡¯
CHOICES: [Should I decline the offer?] go to Part 29 [Should I accept it graciously?] go to Part 31
Part 27 – I Must Decline ¡°I-I am honored and proud to become a crown prince candidate, Father,¡± Simon said, facing King Morel, ¡°but I am afraid that I still lack a lot of things...¡± ¡°Non-sense!¡± the king replied. ¡°You, defeating the behemoth, was proof enough that you are qualified to rule a kingdom, and now, your humility is telling me that I made the right choice, as well!¡± The king reached out and touched his ninth son¡¯s hand. He could feel the callouses on his fingers and see the scars on his arms and knuckles. ¡°I know how hard you have trained for the task I gave you,¡± he told Simon. At least, that was what the servants informed him. ¡°That is why I have decided to name you as a crown prince candidate,¡± he added proudly. ¡°I know that you would do your best to lead the Eastern Kingdom as well, if given a chance.¡± ¡°You are right, Father!¡± Juno said rather cheerfully. ¡°But it seems that my younger sibling still feels that he has much more to prove.¡± ¡°As he should,¡± Largos piped in. ¡°That is true,¡± the king replied before Juno and Largos could say more. ¡°That is why I have decided to send him to the Royal Maralict Imperial University to study and be a more capable leader in the future.¡± ¡°T-The Royal Academy? In the Empire¡¯s capital?¡± asked Simon, who could hardly believe his ears. ¡°Your tutors from the princes¡¯ dormitories, told me that you have excellent grades particularly in subjects concerning government and politics.¡± Juno gave Simon a cold glare. ¡°I-it¡¯s just that, I find the history of our Empire quite interesting, Father,¡± Simon agreed with a shy smile. ¡°And that is why I had decided to send you there this coming school year with your brother Juno...¡± ¡°But father, I don¡¯t think Simon is fit for travel yet,¡± Juno interrupted. ¡°Classes will begin in less than a month, thus I need to leave as soon as possible, since it takes three weeks to travel to the nearest city with a warp to the Empire.¡± ¡°O-oh, it¡¯s okay,¡± said Simon, raising his hand like a child in class, ¡°I hardly feel any pain in my leg, any more.¡± Upon saying this, Simon pushed his chair back, stood up, and did a small jig. ¡°My healer Nell is truly remarkable!¡± he exclaimed. ¡°I guess I am totally healed right now, and could leave for the Academy anytime!¡± Juno glared at him even more. A case of content theft: this narrative is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation. Largos seethed. He was supposed to be the one to accompany Juno to the capital, after all. But Simon was so happy with the prospect of studying in the Imperial University that he missed their annoyed reactions. ¡°That is good then!¡± Juno tried to keep his face straight. ¡°Actually, Father, a royal summons had just arrived from the empire,¡± he informed the king. ¡°A letter from the Emperor himself?¡± King Morel looked surprised. Juno took a scroll from underneath his cloak and handed it to the king. ¡°News of our heroic brother¡¯s deeds have reached as far as the Emperor¡¯s ears,¡± he told King Morel, even before their father could unroll the parchment. ¡°They have requested for the ¡®Hero¡¯ to come to the capital to visit the royal family as soon as he is able.¡± ¡°T-to the Empire¡¯s capital?!¡± Simon stuttered. ¡°Yes. Is there any problem?¡± Juno asked him flatly. ¡°Since our brother is all well now, then there won¡¯t be any problem about traveling immediately, is there?¡± Largo said with a smile. ¡°Then I shall prepare for your departure!¡± the King proclaimed. ¡°You shall leave for the empire¡¯s capital tomorrow!¡± Things went as planned. As was scheduled, Simon met with Countess Ruby and her daughter, Lady Rose that afternoon. She turned out to be another marriage candidate, this one, five years younger than he was. Simon was then escorted to the ¡®former¡¯ 2nd crown prince¡¯s palace, where he would be staying from then on out. The next day was the scheduled visit to the West Kingdom. Simon was awoken quite early to prepare for the luncheon event. ¡°Nell! I am ready for my healing session now,¡± he called to his healer as soon as his attendants finished dressing him up. Simon sat on his bed with Nell on a chair in front of him, clasping his left hand in his. ¡°How did you find your quarters downstairs, Nell?¡± Simon asked him as the healing began. ¡°Did you get the clothes I gave you? I know that they are nothing much, compared to what I am wearing now, but they are still quite usable, right?¡± Nell nodded at him. ¡°I¡¯m glad you seem to like it!¡± Simon beamed. ¡°We shall be leaving for the capital later this afternoon!¡± he continued excitedly. ¡°My father had decided to send me to the Royal Maralict Imperial University, but before that, I must first greet his imperial majesty, Emperor Jonas Maralict of the Holy Maralict Empire.¡± Nell¡¯s head suddenly raised to stare at Simon. He saw a glimpse of his honey brown eyes beneath his mask. They were wide open, while his pink lips, formed a small ¡®o¡¯ of surprise. ¡°Are you excited as well?¡± he asked his friend. ¡°I have always wanted to study in a proper school, but to think that Father would enroll me to the Royal Maralict Imperial University! It is a dream come true for me! In fact, I¡¯m still scared of suddenly waking up!¡± Nell watched Simon laugh gleefully. He later gave a sigh and shook his head. ¡°Is there something wrong, Nell?¡± Simon asked him. Nell lifted his right hand and waved at him. ¡°Why are you waving?¡± Simon asked, his head tilted. ¡°Are you saying goodbye?¡± Nell let go of his hand all together. He pointed at Simon, then raised both arms to flex his muscles. ¡°Are you saying that I am already strong enough?¡± Nell nodded, then waved goodbye once more. ¡°Then, do you mean that I don¡¯t need you anymore?¡± Nell gave him another nod. Simon suddenly felt sad and disappointed. ¡°But I was planning to give you so much more since I¡¯m now a crown prince candidate!¡± he told him with a frown. ¡°We could even see the whole Empire as we travel together!¡± Nell shook his head. He clasped his hands together in prayer, and waved goodbye yet again. Simon gasped as he finally grasped what his healer was trying to say.
CHOICES: [Then I guess, this is goodbye] go to Part 31 [No, I forbid you to leave] go to Part 32
Part 28 – I Accept! ¡°Thank you, Father! I am honored and proud to become a crown prince candidate!¡± Simon said, facing King Morel. ¡°Thank you for giving me this chance to further prove myself! Does this mean that I am taking brother Largo¡¯s place?¡± he asked rather innocently, which earned him a poisonous glare from his older brother. ¡°I have already vacated the palace assigned to me,¡± Prince Largos snarled. ¡°You can move to the 2nd prince¡¯s residence this afternoon.¡± ¡°Oh, thank you, brother Largos!¡± Simon happily replied, his insensitive remark, pissing off Largos even more. ¡°I thank you too, father, Your Highness, for putting your trust and believing in me!¡± ¡°That¡¯s really nice, father!¡± Juno said rather cheerfully. ¡°But don¡¯t you think that our younger sibling still has a lot to prove?¡± ¡°Exactly,¡± Largos piped in. ¡°That is why I would like to suggest something to you, Father,¡± Juno continued. ¡°And what might that be?¡± the king asked. ¡°A royal summons had just arrived from the empire,¡± Juno informed them. ¡°A letter from the Emperor himself?¡± King Morel looked surprised. Juno took a scroll from underneath his cloak and handed it to the king. ¡°News of our heroic brother¡¯s deeds have reached as far as the Emperor¡¯s ears,¡± he told King Morel, even before their father could unroll the parchment. ¡°They have requested for the ¡®Hero¡¯ to come to the capital to visit the royal family as soon as he is able.¡± ¡°T-to the royal capital?!¡± Simon stuttered. ¡°But it would take a month at least to journey to the capital...¡± the king said thoughtfully, ¡°and your brother¡¯s injuries have not fully recovered yet...¡± ¡°T-that¡¯s right!¡± Simon quickly agreed. ¡°Father, haven¡¯t you noticed, Simon did not bring his walking stick today,¡± Largos pointed out, ¡°also, he doesn¡¯t seem to be limping anymore. Besides,¡± he added with a smirk, ¡°doesn¡¯t he have that healer that the Stone Temple priests lent him?¡± ¡°You do have a point there...¡± The king frowned and rubbed his bearded chin. ¡°Simon, how is your leg? Do you think you can make the journey if your healer accompanies you?¡± Simon couldn¡¯t help but confess the truth. ¡°Y-yes, Father,¡± he replied, ¡°i-in fact, I hardly feel any pain anymore. Nell is an excellent healer.¡± ¡°Then I shall prepare for your departure tomorrow!¡± the King proclaimed. ¡°Of course, father,¡± Juno said with a sly smile. ¡°This is perfect after all,¡± continued their father, ¡°since I have also decided to send you to the Royal Maralict Imperial University.¡± ¡°What?¡± Juno and Largos asked in unison. ¡°I heard from the royal tutors that your brother here is quite capable in his studies,¡± King Morel explained, ¡°thus, I have decided to send him to University with you, Juno,¡± he went on. ¡°I want you to help your brother be a more capable leader in the future.¡± Things went as planned. As was scheduled, Simon met with Countess Ruby and her daughter, Lady Rose that afternoon. She turned out to be another marriage candidate, this one, five years younger than he was. Simon was then escorted to the ¡®former¡¯ 2nd crown prince¡¯s palace, where he would be staying from then on out. The next day was the visit to the West Kingdom. Simon was woken quite early to prepare for the luncheon event. ¡°Shall we leave for the luncheon now, your highness?¡± Rode asked him as soon as his new attendants finished dressing him up. ¡°Yes, it would be better to leave early,¡± Simon replied. Enjoying this book? Seek out the original to ensure the author gets credit. As he left his room, he saw Nell standing by the doorway. ¡°Ah, Nell, there you are!¡± he greeted him brightly. ¡°I don¡¯t think I¡¯ll be needing your help today,¡± he told the healer. ¡°I am feeling so much better, that I think it would be just a waste of your talent to heal me any further, you can just stay here for the rest of the day. After all, we¡¯ll be traveling to the Empire¡¯s capital later this afternoon.¡± Upon the mention of the empire, Nell suddenly raised his head. His veiled face, though hidden, showed alarm. He reached out a hand to touch Simon¡¯s arm. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Nell,¡± Simon reassured him, ¡°Like I said, I¡¯m much better now!¡± Saying this, Simon did a small jig to prove that he was now capable of walking on his own. ¡°Just pack your essentials for our departure,¡± he said hurriedly, ¡°for now, I need to visit my uncle, King Maurice Jobert Krems of the West Kingdom. I¡¯ll see you later!¡± Simon rode a charger on their way to the West Kingdom. He was accompanied by his brother, Prince Juno and several royal guards. The citizens were all happy to see him again. Like yesterday¡¯s festivities, they were throwing flowers upon his path while singing him praises. ¡°Long live the Hero of the Twin Kingdoms!¡± they cried. ¡°Hurrah to the 9th Prince!¡± ¡°Cheers to the Behemoth slayer!¡± Simon waved back to the crowd as he passed, his face bright with pride. Even more people welcomed him as their entourage entered the West kingdom. A choir of children sang of his glory, while performers danced on the streets. There were even trained beasts who lowered their heads as he passed by. King Maurice Jobert Krems of the West Kingdom stood waiting by the Palace gates when Simon arrived. He welcomed Simon with open arms as soon as the prince got off his charger, and ushered him inside their palace. ¡°Welcome, dear nephew!¡± he said with a wide grin on his bearded face. ¡°I welcome the Twin Kingdom¡¯s Hero into my humble abode!¡± ¡°I am most delighted with your invitation, your majesty, King Maurice,¡± replied Simon with a deep bow. ¡°Oh, please drop the formalities, just call me Uncle Maurice!¡± said the King with a loud laugh. ¡°T-then, I thank you for the invite, Uncle Maurice,¡± said Simon with a shy smile. This was the first time he had seen this uncle up close. During royal events, the younger princes are assigned on a table separate from the kings and the first two sons, as well as the queens and royal consorts or concubines. King Maurice, as his father¡¯s twin, does have a lot in common with King Morel. Their eyes were both as blue as the sky, and both have the same golden hair as Simon¡¯s, though theirs already had a lot of gray mixed into it. In fact, even their beards were about the same length. But that¡¯s where the similarities end. King Maurice, unlike Simon¡¯s father, is much fatter, as he has let himself go through the years. He is well known as a very lax ruler who prefers to go to parties and hunting expeditions, rather than attend political meetings. That is why he has left all the responsibility of governing the kingdom to his wise queen. She was educated in the capital, after all. ¡°You do know my twins, Lucy and Skye?¡± the king asked his nephew. Two young lovely blonde princesses stepped forward and gave Simon a curtsy. ¡°And my two eldest sons, Hayle and Jude?¡± two princes in grand blue coats gave him a curt bow. ¡°It is a pleasure to meet you all,¡± greeted Simon with his own bow. ¡°The pleasure is ours, oh, great hero,¡± replied West Twin Kingdom¡¯s eldest Prince, Hayle.¡± He looked about the same age as Largos, and acted the same, with the same sarcastic tone. ¡°For today¡¯s special guest, we had prepared a hunt in the Royal Woods,¡± said the king as they led Simon inside the palace, and out a back door, towards a vast open area. ¡°Alas, your father informed me that you cannot stay too long since you would be leaving for the capital later this afternoon.¡± ¡°That is right, Uncle Maurice,¡± said Simon. ¡°Ah, but isn¡¯t that such a shame?¡± said Prince Hayle with a disappointed pout on his face. ¡°We were so looking forward to seeing the Twin Kingdom¡¯s Hero in action!¡± ¡°I-I guess so...¡± said Simon, not really knowing how to react to his words. ¡°Then why not hold a short hunting game instead?¡± said Prince Jude. ¡°A short hunting game?¡± Simon asked. He had never gone hunting before, since his father only brings his brothers Juno and Largos when he wants to go hunting. He looked at his brother Prince Juno who has been quiet since they left their own kingdom. ¡°Brother, is it okay to go on a short hunt?¡± he asked him. ¡°But of course!¡± Prince Juno replied, standing next to Prince Hayle. ¡°We still have enough time to do so.¡± ¡°Good, since we have been dying to see the hero in action!¡± said Prince Hayle, his smile widening. Two attendants came when he clapped his hands twice, carrying crossbows of black wood and silver. Several others followed, towing in crates with rabbits inside them. ¡°Wonderful!¡± King Maurice bellowed with a jolly laugh. ¡°It¡¯s a blessing that you are now completely healed!¡± ¡°Well, it is true that I¡¯m feeling much better now,¡± Simon answered with a smile. He was feeling quite elated from all the praise. He took a crossbow from one of the servants and checked it out. He had never actually used one before, but he¡¯s been taught how to use a bow since he was 8, and decided it had the same principle. ¡°Let me show you how to use that, cousin.¡± Prince Jude went closer and armed the crossbow. ¡°All you have to do is aim and click the trigger.¡± ¡°Oh, it¡¯s so much more easier to use than a composite bow!¡± ¡°Exactly, all you have to do is pull this lever back to set the bow string, and place the arrow like so,¡± said Prince Jude. ¡°Thank you for teaching me!¡± Again, the prince grinned at him. ¡°Anything, for the kingdom¡¯s Hero!¡± replied Prince Jude. ¡°Now, we can see firsthand how good you are at hunting!¡± said his brother Prince Hayle. Simon smiled back at his two cousins. Their voices were so full of awe and admiration that he felt like he could do anything! ¡®I guess I shouldn¡¯t disappoint them,¡¯ he thought to himself, ¡®I mean, how hard could it be to hunt a rabbit with a weapon like this?¡¯ ¡°If you are ready, brother, we should enter the enclosed woods where the animals have been released,¡± Juno told him. ¡°Of course, brother!¡± Simon answered with a big grin of his own. ¡°Lead the way.¡±
Go to Part 30
Part 29 – I Am Honored! ¡°T-thank you, Father, I-I am honored to become a crown prince candidate!¡± Simon said, facing King Morel. ¡°But what about brother Largo?¡± he asked rather innocently, which gained him a poisonous glare from his older brother. ¡°He has already vacated from the palace assigned to him,¡± said the King. ¡°You can move to the 2nd prince¡¯s residence this afternoon.¡± ¡°I-is that so?¡± Simon cautiously looked at his two brothers. They didn¡¯t seem to mind the news. Probably because their father had already talked it over with them. ¡°I thank you too, father, Your Highness, for putting your trust and believing in me!¡± ¡°That is right!¡± Juno said rather cheerfully. ¡°But Father, don¡¯t you think that our younger sibling still has a lot to prove?¡± ¡°Exactly,¡± Largos piped in. ¡°That is why I would like to suggest something to you, Father,¡± Juno continued. ¡°And what might that be?¡± the king asked. ¡°A royal summons had just arrived from the empire,¡± Juno informed them. ¡°A letter from the Emperor himself?¡± the King looked surprised. Juno took a scroll from underneath his cloak and handed it to the king. ¡°News of our heroic brother¡¯s deeds have reached as far as the Emperor¡¯s ears,¡± Juno told King Morel, even before he could unroll the parchment. ¡°They have requested for the ¡®Hero¡¯ to come to the capital to visit as soon as he is able.¡± ¡°T-the r-royal c-capital?!¡± Simon stuttered even more. ¡°But it would take a month at least to journey to the capital...¡± the king said thoughtfully, ¡°and your brother¡¯s injuries have not fully recovered yet...¡± ¡°T-that¡¯s right!¡± Simon quickly agreed. ¡°Father, haven¡¯t you noticed, Simon did not bring his walking stick today,¡± Largos pointed out, ¡°also, he doesn¡¯t seem to be limping anymore. Besides,¡± he added with a smirk, ¡°doesn¡¯t he have that healer that the Stone Temple priests lent him?¡± ¡°You do have a point there...¡± The king frowned and rubbed his bearded chin. ¡°Simon, how is your leg? Do you think you can make the journey if your healer is with you?¡± Simon couldn¡¯t help but confess the truth. ¡°Y-yes, Father,¡± he replied, ¡°i-in fact, I hardly feel any pain anymore. Nell is an excellent healer, but...¡± he quickly added, ¡°what if I never get to use the power i used back then?¡± ¡°That may be true,¡± said the king. ¡°There had been cases where people suddenly acquire great power, and just as suddenly lose them, in other cases, they never get to manifest this power again,¡± he said, nodding his head. ¡°But that does not change the fact that you are a hero who saved our kingdom.¡± King Morel reached out to touch his son¡¯s hand. ¡°That is why I have decided to send you to the Royal Maralict Imperial University to study and be a capable leader in the future,¡± the King proclaimed. ¡°You shall leave for the empire¡¯s capital tomorrow!¡± ¡°What?¡± Juno and Largos asked in unison. ¡°I heard from the royal tutors that your brother here is quite capable in his studies,¡± King Morel explained, ¡°thus, I have decided to send him to University with you, Juno,¡± he went on. ¡°I want you to help your brother be a more capable leader in the future.¡± News of going to University made Simon very excited, gave Simon slight indigestion. He went straight to his room and asked his attendants to ready his things for their journey until Rode fetched him at 3. ¡°Where should we head to for now, Rode?¡± he asked the butler as soon as the luncheon was over. ¡°We are to meet Duke Fann, Earl Summers, and Countess Ruby in the North Garden with their daughters, since you failed to meet them earlier,¡± replied Rode who ushered a guilty looking Simon to the Garden. This particular location was usually used to entertain guests. A case of content theft: this narrative is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation. There is a large pergola in the middle, surrounded by flowering bushes, with the main path leading to it, covered in climbing roses. The sweet scent of the delicate flowers surrounded Simon as he made his way to the pergola. ¡°This place is so enchanting!¡± he couldn¡¯t help himself from saying, his upset tummy slightly getting better. ¡°This is the first time I¡¯ve been here, or anywhere else in the main palace,¡± he added. Rode kept silent, as a butler was supposed to. He stepped aside when they reached the covered sitting area and announced Simon¡¯s arrival. ¡°His highness, Prince Simon, has arrived.¡± Simon looked at the people gathered around a circular marble table in the middle. They stood as he entered and lowered their heads. ¡°These are Duke Fann and the Duchess Desal, with their children, Princess Tina and Princess Fay,¡± he said, addressing two young princesses who stood at either side of their bulky middle-aged father. ¡°Earl Summers, with his daughter Lady June.¡± Rode continued, pointing at a sharp looking man and his companion, ¡°and Countess Ruby and her daughter Lady Rose.¡± A plump lady in red bowed low at Simon, accompanied by a very young girl. Compared to the elderly Duke, the slim looking Earl Summers looked quite the academic with his silver spectacles and sleek black hair, so did his daughter who wore a simple moss green dress with her black hair tied in a neat bun. ¡°It is a pleasure to meet you, your highness, Prince Simon,¡± they all greeted him. ¡°T-the pleasure is all mine,¡± said Simon with a curt bow. It was a good thing that he haven¡¯t forgotten the basic etiquette lessons he was taught as a kid. Rode pulled out a seat for Simon who sat between Duke Fann¡¯s eldest daughter Tina, and Earl Summers¡¯ daughter June. Both looked much older than him,while Fay and the much younger Rose, sat in front of him. ¡°I had no idea his highness looks so handsome up close!¡± Duchess Desal cooed. ¡°You look so nice sitting next to our lovely Tina!¡± Simon looked at the Duchess, then at her daughter who seemed to be in her mid-twenties. She has straight brown hair and green eyes like her father. ¡°I thank you for the compliment,¡± he replied with a shy smile. He didn¡¯t really feel like talking much. ¡°Ah, but don¡¯t you think my June suits you better?¡± Earl Summers piped in, ¡°She just turned seventeen last month, she would make a good conversation partner since she is closer to your age.¡± ¡°Oh, but wouldn¡¯t his highness rather be with someone younger?¡± said Countess Ruby. ¡°I¡¯m sure he¡¯ll find my precious Rose more charming.¡± ¡°Would you like to play with me, Prince Simon?¡± the child asked. She looked no older than 10 years old. The Duke harrumphed. ¡°Well, if he is looking for someone closer to his age, then he might as well choose our little Fay who just turned thirteen this month! She is being educated in the prestigious Convent of the Blue Dove, where the empress mother graduated herself!¡± ¡°Well, my June came from the Convent of the Lilac Rose, which is famous for instructing princesses in the ways of art, beauty, and grace!¡± Earl Summers bragged. ¡°Oh, my mother came from that convent as well!¡± said Simon, glad to be part of the conversation. ¡°I See, your highness, then it would be best if you choose my June as your future companion!¡± Earl Summers said triumphantly. ¡°A companion?¡± Simon asked with a questioning look on his face. ¡°Well, my father did say that he would send me to University,¡± he mumbled. ¡°Will they be coming with me to the capital, then?¡± Simon looked at the nobles seated around him. He noticed that they were all looking at him as if they were staring at a fool. It was only June who stared at him with the slightest hint of interest. ¡°Ah, your highness,¡± Earl Summers cleared his throat. ¡°You seem to have misunderstood us...¡± ¡°Your highness, when we say companion, we did not mean someone who would merely ¡®accompany¡¯ you,¡± the Countess laughed. ¡°We meant someone who would stay by your side,¡± continued Duke Fann. ¡°Both in your work, and in your bed.¡± ¡°In my bed?¡± Simon¡¯s forehead creased. ¡°What kind of work would we need to do in be¨C¡± The Duke¡¯s words finally seeped in. Simon¡¯s face turned all red. ¡°M-my goodness!¡± he muttered, covering his face in embarrassment. The Countess laughed even more, while the princesses kept their composure, their eyes, low, their lips pursed, except for princess June who kept her deep blue eyes staring at Simon. ¡°I-I¡¯m afraid I¡¯m still t-too young to think of m-marriage proposals!¡± he stuttered. ¡°S-shouldn¡¯t you be asking my father about that instead?¡± ¡°Your highness, there¡¯s no reason to be flustered,¡± said Earl Summers, ¡°this is merely a small meeting for you to be acquainted with our daughters!¡± ¡°Please don¡¯t mind my husband¡¯s straightforwardness,¡± said the Duchess. ¡°We just wish to show our appreciation to your heroic deed of ridding our Twin Kingdoms of the threat of the evil behemoth.¡± ¡°That is right, your highness,¡± the Earl smiled at Simon. ¡°We are here to show you that we are ready to support you in any way we can. Thus, we wish that you will consider our daughters in the near future.¡± ¡°Yes, your highness,¡± the duke spoke once again. ¡°But if you wish, we can let you marry our youngest, Fay, right now, you can just consummate your wedding vows when you feel like it!¡± he said with a loud laugh. ¡°Ugh, Duke Fann! You and your vulgar words!¡± Earl Summers said, shaking his head. ¡°And you, Earl Summers, should keep to your books, I¡¯m sure your daughter would make a fine librarian some day!¡± Simon watched as the two fathers bickered with each other. In his lessons in politics, he learned that Duke Fann was a general in the royal army while Earl Summers was the head of finance in the Eastern Twin Kingdom. They were both quite influential, that¡¯s why he couldn¡¯t understand why the two were trying to wed their daughters to him. The two kept bickering until the Butler cleared his throat. ¡°Your highness, please do think of my June when you choose a companion,¡± Earl Summers told him. ¡°Why bother, when he can just take them all as his wives!¡± Countess Ruby said, laughing haughtily. ¡°Dear Countess, you know well that only the crown prince has the right to have concubines,¡± Duches Desal said with a forced smile. ¡°Well, I wouldn¡¯t be surprised if we get a new crown prince in the near future!¡± Duke Fann announced with a laugh. He went to Simon¡¯s side and clapped him on the back so hard, the young prince went off balanced. ¡°Why don¡¯t you young ones spend some time in this magnificent garden of yours while us old folk stay here to greet each other?¡± ¡°Then, I shall do just that,¡± Simon replied with a nervous laugh, glad to have a reason to leave the bickering nobles.
Go to Part 34
Part 31- I Am Lacking ¡°I-I am honored, father...¡± Simon mumbled, ¡°B-but I am afraid that I still lack a lot of things...¡± ¡°Non-sense!¡± the king replied. ¡°You, defeating the behemoth, was proof enough that you are qualified to rule a kingdom, and now, your humility is telling me that I made the right choice as well! That is why I have decided to name you as a crown prince candidate,¡± the said proudly. ¡°I know that you would do your best to lead the East Kingdom, if given a chance.¡± ¡°But what about brother Largo?¡± Simon asked rather innocently, which gained a poisonous glare from his older brother. ¡°He has already vacated from the palace assigned to him,¡± said the King. ¡°You can move to the 2nd prince¡¯s residence this afternoon.¡± ¡°I-is that so?¡± Simon cautiously looked at his two brothers. They didn¡¯t seem to mind the news. Probably because their father had already talked it over with them. ¡°B-but Father, what if I was only lucky?¡± he quickly asked the king. ¡°What if what ever power I got that day, had all been exhausted, and that I never get to use the same power again?¡± ¡°That may be true,¡± said the king. ¡°There had been cases where people suddenly acquire great power, and just as suddenly lose them, in such cases, they never get to manifest this power again,¡± The king nodded his head thoughtfully. ¡°But that does not change the fact that you are a hero who saved our kingdom.¡± King Morel reached out to touch his 9th son¡¯s hand. He could feel the callouses on his fingers and saw the scars on his arm and knuckles. ¡°I know how hard you have trained for that task I gave you, Simon¡± he told his son. It was what the servants informed him, after all. ¡°Your tutors from the princes¡¯ dormitory also told me that you have excellent grades as well, particularly in subjects concerning government and politics.¡± Juno gave Simon a cold glare. ¡°I-it¡¯s just that, I find the history of our Empire quite interesting, Father,¡± Simon confessed while wringing his hands. ¡°And that is why I have decided to send you to the Royal Maralict Imperial University to study and be a capable leader in the future.¡± ¡°T-The Royal Academy?¡± asked Simon who could hardly believe what he heard. ¡°In the Empire¡¯s capital?¡± He suddenly forgot his earlier reluctance. ¡°You shall be attending university this coming school year with your brother Juno...¡± ¡°But father, I don¡¯t think Simon is fit for travel yet,¡± Juno interrupted. ¡°Classes will begin in less than a month, thus I need to leave as soon as possible, since it takes three weeks to travel to the nearest city with a warp to the Empire.¡± ¡°O-oh, it-s okay,¡± said Simon, raising his hand like a child in class, ¡°I hardly feel any pain now.¡± Upon saying this, Simon pushed his chair back, stood up straight, and jumped several times to prove this. ¡°My healer Nell is truly remarkable!¡± he exclaimed. ¡°I guess I am totally healed right now, and could leave for the capital anytime!¡± Juno glared at him. Largos seethed. He was supposed to be the one joining Juno after all. Simon was so happy with the prospect of studying in the Imperial University, that he missed their annoyed reactions. ¡°That is perfect, then!¡± said the King with a loud laugh. Juno tried to keep his face straight. ¡°Actually, Father, aroyal summons had just arrived from the empire,¡± he informed the king. ¡°A letter from the Emperor himself?¡± King Morel looked surprised. Juno took a scroll from underneath his cloak and handed it to the king. ¡°News of our heroic brother¡¯s deeds have reached as far as the Emperor¡¯s ears,¡± he told King Morel, even before their father could unroll the parchment. ¡°They have requested for the ¡®Hero¡¯ to come to the capital to visit the royal family as soon as he is able.¡± ¡°T-to the Empire¡¯s capital?!¡± Simon stuttered. ¡°Yes. Is there a problem?¡± Juno asked him flatly. ¡°Since our brother is all well now, then there won¡¯t be any problem about traveling immediately, is there?¡± Largo said with a smile. If you discover this tale on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the violation. ¡°Then I shall prepare for your departure!¡± the King proclaimed. ¡°You shall leave for the empire¡¯s capital tomorrow!¡± News of going to University made Simon very excited, even though the prospect of meeting the emperor gave him slight indigestion. He went straight to his room and asked his attendants to ready his things for their journey. He helped them with the preparations until Rode fetched him at 3 to meet his noble visitors. ¡°Are we heading for tea now, Rode?¡± he asked the butler. ¡°Yes, your highness, you are to meet Duke Fann, Earl Summers, and Countess Ruby in the North Garden with their families, since you refused to meet them earlier,¡± replied Rode.¡± Simon felt his face burn as he was ushered to the North Garden which was often used to entertain guests from nobility. There is a large pergola in the middle, surrounded by flowering bushes, with the main path leading to it, covered in climbing roses. The sweet scent of the delicate flowers surrounded Simon as he made his way to the pergola, easing his tummy ache. ¡°This place is so enchanting!¡± he said with a small childish laugh. ¡°This is the first time I¡¯ve been here, or anywhere else in the main palace.¡± Rode kept silent, as a butler was supposed to. He stepped aside when they reached the covered sitting area and announced Simon¡¯s arrival. ¡°His highness, Prince Simon, 9th prince of the Eastern Twin Kingdom, has arrived.¡± Simon looked at the people gathered around a large, circular marble table in the middle. They stood in reverence as he entered and lowered their heads. ¡°These are Duke Fann and the Duchess Desal, with their children, Princess Tina and Princess Fay,¡± he said, addressing two young princesses who stood at either side of their bulky middle-aged father. ¡°Earl Summers, with his daughter Lady June,¡± Rode continued, pointing at a sharp looking man and his companion, ¡°and Countess Ruby and her daughter Lady Rose.¡± A plump lady in red bowed low at Simon, accompanied by a very young girl. Compared to the elderly Duke, the slim looking Earl Summers looked quite the academic with his silver spectacles and sleek black hair, so did his daughter who wore a simple moss green dress with her black hair tied in a neat bun. ¡°It is a pleasure to meet you, your highness, Prince Simon,¡± they all greeted him. ¡°P-please... t-the pleasure is all mine,¡± Simon stuttered as he gave a curt bow. It was a good thing that he haven¡¯t forgotten the basic etiquette lessons he was taught as a kid. Rode pulled out a seat for Simon who sat between Duke Fann¡¯s eldest daughter Tina, and Earl Summers¡¯ daughter June. Both looked much older than him,while Fay and the much younger Rose, sat in front of him. ¡°I had no idea his highness looks so handsome up close!¡± Duchess Desal cooed. ¡°You look so nice sitting next to our lovely Tina!¡± Simon looked at the Duchess, then at her daughter who seemed to be in her mid-twenties. She has straight brown hair and green eyes like her father. ¡°T-thank you for the compliment, your daughter is lovely as well...¡± he replied with a shy smile. ¡°Ah, but don¡¯t you think my June suits you better?¡± Earl Summers piped in, ¡°She just turned seventeen last month, she would make a good conversation partner since she is closer to your age.¡± ¡°Oh, but wouldn¡¯t his highness rather be with someone younger?¡± said Countess Ruby. ¡°I¡¯m sure he¡¯ll find my precious Rose more charming.¡± ¡°Would you like to play with me, Prince Simon?¡± the child asked. She looked no older than 10 years old. The Duke harrumphed. ¡°Well, if he is looking for someone closer to his age, then he might as well choose our little Fay who just turned thirteen this month! She is being educated in the prestigious Convent of the Blue Dove, where the empress mother graduated herself!¡± ¡°Well, my June came from the Convent of the Lilac Rose, which is famous for instructing princesses in the ways of art, beauty, and grace! It would be great if his highness takes her as your future companion!¡± ¡°A companion?¡± Simon couldn¡¯t seem to keep up with the conversation. ¡°Well, my father did say that he would send me to the Imperial University tomorrow, Will they be coming with me to the capital, then?¡± Simon looked awkwardly at the nobles seated around him. He noticed that they all looked confused. It was only June who stared at him with a hint of interest, her deepblueeyes wide open. ¡°Ah, your highness,¡± Earl Summers cleared his throat. ¡°You seem to have misunderstood us...¡± ¡°Your highness, when we say companion, we did not mean someone who would merely ¡®accompany¡¯ you,¡± the Countess laughed. ¡°We meant someone who would stay by your side,¡± continued Duke Fann. ¡°Both in your work, and in your bed.¡± ¡°In my bed?¡± Simon¡¯s forehead creased. ¡°Why would I need to work in be¨C¡± The Duke¡¯s words finally seeped in. Simon¡¯s face turned all red. ¡°M-my goodness!¡± he muttered, covering his face in embarrassment. The Countess laughed even louder, while the princesses kept their composure, their eyes, low, their lips pursed. ¡°I-I¡¯m afraid I¡¯m still t-too young to think of m-marriage!¡± he stuttered. ¡°S-shouldn¡¯t you be asking my father about s-stuff like that instead?¡± ¡°Your highness, there¡¯s no reason to be flustered,¡± said Earl Summers, ¡°this is merely a small meeting for you to be acquainted with our daughters!¡± ¡°Please don¡¯t mind my husband¡¯s straightforwardness,¡± said the Duchess. ¡°We just wish to show our appreciation to your heroic deed of ridding our Twin Kingdoms of the threat of the evil behemoth.¡± ¡°That is right, your highness,¡± the Earl smiled at Simon. ¡°We are here to show you that we are ready to support you in any way we can. Thus, we wish that you will consider our daughters in the near future.¡± ¡°Yes, your highness,¡± the duke spoke once again. ¡°But if you wish, we can let you marry our youngest, Fey, right now, you can just consummate your wedding vows when you feel like it!¡± he said with a loud laugh. ¡°Ugh, Duke Fann! You and your vulgar thoughts!¡± Earl Summers said, shaking his head. ¡°And you, Earl Summers, are still as stiff as the spine of the books you love to read! I¡¯m sure your daughter would make a fine librarian some day!¡± Simon watched as the two fathers bickered with each other. In his lessons in politics, he learned that Duke Fann was a general in the royal army while Earl Summers was the head of finance in the Eastern Twin Kingdom. They were both quite influential, that¡¯s why he couldn¡¯t understand why the two were trying to wed their daughters to him. The two kept bickering until the Butler cleared his throat. ¡°Your highness, please do think of my June when you choose a companion,¡± Earl Summers told him. ¡°Why bother, when he can just take them all as his wives!¡± Countess Ruby said, laughing haughtily. ¡°Dear Countess, you know well that only the crown prince has the right to have concubines,¡± Duches Desal said with a forced smile. ¡°Well, I wouldn¡¯t be surprised if we get a new crown prince in the near future!¡± Duke Fann announced with a laugh. He went to Simon¡¯s side and clapped him on the back so hard, the young prince went off balanced. ¡°Why don¡¯t you young ones spend some time in this magnificent garden of yours while us old folk stay here to catch up with each other?¡± ¡°Then, I shall do just that,¡± replied Simon, glad to have a reason to leave the bickering parents behind.
Go to Part 34
Part 30 – The Hunt Simon was led into the enclosed woods with the rest of the royals. ¡°You may take any path you wish to choose, Prince Simon,¡± said Prince Jude, ¡°but since you are new to this, I would like to volunteer to guide you along the way.¡± ¡°A noble idea! You¡¯re sure to catch the most rabbits then, since Jude is the best hunter in our kingdom!¡± Prince Hayle said proudly while patting his younger brother on the back. ¡°Thank you, cousin Jude!¡± Simon said. He was so excited for the hunt, that he failed to notice the second prince¡¯s smile slightly waver. The two of them separated from the others. Prince Jude led Simon into the enclosed woods, where he was able to capture a couple of rabbits. ¡°Wow, cousin! I had no idea you were this good with an arrow!¡± Jude exclaimed while clapping his hands. ¡°This is nothing,¡± Simon said proudly, enjoying himself. ¡°I¡¯m afraid I¡¯m all out of arrows, though...¡± he showed Juno the empty quiver that contain two dozen arrows earlier. ¡°Ah, you can use my arrows, then!¡± ¡°But you haven¡¯t caught anything yet,¡± Simon said, laughing. ¡°Watching you is so entertaining that I have no time to catch my own game,¡± Jude laughed with him. ¡°Now, let¡¯s go further, all the animals here seem to have been caught already.¡± ¡°Lead the way then!¡± said Simon. ¡°This is so entertaining! It is such a shame that we can¡¯t hunt all day since we¡¯re leaving for the Capital later in the afternoon,¡± he told his cousin as they went deeper into the woods. ¡°We better make the most of it then,¡± Jude smiled at him. ¡°Ah, do you see that area where the grass is bent?¡± he asked, pointing at a small clearing. ¡°It looks like a burrow, I¡¯m sure you would catch more rabbits over there!¡± ¡°Leave it to me, then!¡± said Simon who stealthily made his way to the clearing. He had his bow at the ready, his finger at the trigger, as he peeped over a hedge and saw a furry brown patch moving from behind a bush. ¡°I¡¯ve got you now!¡± he said to himself as he aimed at the critter and pulled the trigger. ¡®KWIIIIII!!!¡¯ A bloodcurdling squeal broke the silence in the woods. The small furry critter scrambled out of the bush and turned out to be the backside of a huge black boar! A dumbfounded Simon stared at it as it pawed the ground and rushed towards him! He tried to run away. He turned around, looking for Prince Jude for help, but there was nobody there. Next thing he knew, he was flying up in the air, his backside burning. He fell hard on the ground, and saw the furious boar rushing at him once more. This was followed by unbelievable pain, as the boar trampled and tore at his stomach with its razor tipped tusks. It didn¡¯t stop until he was at the edge of death, and as he lay on the ground, breathing his last, he heard footsteps coming closer. He was thankful, thinking that we could call for help, but he was too mangled to utter a single word, until he heard them speak. ¡°You were right, he really is a fake!¡± he heard Prince Jude¡¯s voice, followed by a chuckle. ¡°I told you so,¡± he heard his brother Juno¡¯s voice this time. ¡°It¡¯s impossible for a worm such as that to have killed a behemoth. The knights and soldiers with him probably did all the work, while this bastard reaped all the glory.¡± ¡°I guess you owe me one, then, cousin Juno.¡± ¡°Just tell me where and when,¡± answered Juno, ¡°I¡¯ll get rid of your brother, Prince Hayle, for you.¡± Simon couldn¡¯t help but cry as he heard their conversation. He couldn¡¯t believe his own brother had planned for him to die. ¡°Oh, it seems he¡¯s still alive,¡± came Juno¡¯s cold voice. He heard the sound of a sword being unsheathed. ¡°No,¡± Jude stopped him. ¡°A sword wound would look suspicious, use a rock instead. That rock was the last thing Simon saw, as well as his brother Juno¡¯s face, with a smile of contempt on his blood red lips.
bad ending ??
Unauthorized use of content: if you find this story on Amazon, report the violation. Part 32 – This is Goodbye ¡°But... Nell, I need you!¡± Simon said, his eyes filling with tears. ¡°You are the first friend I have ever made, in fact, you are my only friend! And I just want to share my good fortune with you!¡± Nell shook his head once more. Something told Simon, that this time, he can¡¯t force the healer to do as he wanted. He has his own life, too. ¡°Can¡¯t I... can¡¯t I change your mind anymore?¡± he asked one last time. Again, Nell shook his head, before touching Simon¡¯s hand once more to continue their healing session. ¡°I guess this is the last time I get healed by you, then?¡± he asked sadly. Nell reached out a hand to path his left shoulder. ¡°Then I should thank you with all my heart.¡± Simon gave the healer a bright smile. ¡°Thank you for everything, Nell,¡± he told the novice priest. ¡°I shall tell the servants to give you a small amount as compensation. You may leave as soon as I leave for the capital, and I wish you all the luck in your travels.¡± Simon and his brother Juno visited the kingdom of the West Twin the next morning. The citizens exulted him once more, throwing flowers upon his path and singing him praises. He waved at the crowd as he passed, his face shining with pride. Even more people welcomed him as their entourage entered the West palace. A choir of children sang of his glory, while performers danced around them. There were even trained beasts who lowered their heads as he passed by. King Maurice Jobert Krems of the ¡°Welcome, dear nephew!¡± he said with a wide grin on his bearded face. ¡°I welcome the Twin Kingdom¡¯s Hero into my humble abode!¡± ¡°I am most delighted with your invitation, your majesty, King Maurice,¡± replied Simon with a deep bow. ¡°Oh, please drop the formalities, just call me Uncle Maurice!¡± said the King with a loud laugh. ¡°T-then, I thank you for the invite, Uncle Maurice,¡± Simon said with a shy smile. ¡° Stolen story; please report. ¡°It is a pleasure to meet you all,¡± said Simon, bowing himself. ¡°The pleasure is ours, oh, great hero,¡± replied the West Twin Kingdom¡¯s eldest, Prince Hayle.¡± He looked about the same age as Largos, and acted the same, with the same sarcastic tone. ¡°For today¡¯s special guest, we had prepared a hunt in the Royal Woods,¡± said the king as they led Simon further inside the palace and out a back door, towards a vast open area. ¡°Alas, your father informed me that you cannot stay too long since you would be leaving for the capital later this afternoon?¡± ¡°That is right, Uncle Maurice,¡± Simon replied. ¡°We¡¯re supposed to leave for the capital soon, since the Emperor had summoned me.¡± ¡°Ah, but isn¡¯t that such a shame?¡± said Prince Hayle with a disappointed look on his face. ¡°We were so looking forward to seeing the Twin Kingdom¡¯s Hero in action!¡± ¡°I-I guess so,¡± said Simon, feeling relieved, ¡°perhaps we can do that some other time, when we return from the capital.¡± ¡°Then why not hold a small hunting game instead?¡± Prince Jude suggested. ¡°A small hunting game?¡± asked Simon. ¡°I¡¯m afraid we don¡¯t have enough time for that, right, brother Juno?¡± he asked his brother who has been very quiet since they left their castle. ¡°Of course we do!¡± Prince Juno replied, standing next to Prince Hayle. ¡°We still have more than enough time to spare.¡± ¡°Good, shall we head to the enclosed garden, then?¡± asked Prince Hayle, his smile widening. ¡°Actually, I don¡¯t think feel like doing something else this morning,¡± Simon said, raising his voice. ¡°I haven¡¯t recovered my strength, yet, and I might injure myself further if I force myself to do something I¡¯m not used to.¡± He couldn''t wait to visit the capital, after all. Besides, he¡¯s never been hunting before. Only his majesties, the Kings of the Twin Kingdoms, and their two first born sons were allowed to participate in such events. He was also hesitant to use a crossbow, when all he had ever handled before, was a simple composite bow and arrow. ¡°Oh, but I thought you said, you¡¯re feeling much better already?¡± his brother Juno asked him in a sarcastic tone. ¡°Isn¡¯t that the reason why our Father decided to send you to the capital immediately?¡± ¡°That¡¯s true, but I really haven¡¯t recovered all my strength yet...¡± Simon insisted. ¡°Would you want me to get injured if I force myself?¡± ¡°Really? Is that all the new ¡®Hero¡¯ is capable of?¡± said Prince Jude who gave a little laugh to pass his comment as a joke. Simon felt his face burn as the two other princes laughed at this joke. ¡°I guess I¡¯m not the hero you expected me to be,¡± Simon looked straight at his cousin¡¯s dark blue eyes. ¡°but I am still a hero none the less,¡± he continued. ¡°I did get rid of the behemoth, after all, or perhaps you wish to challenge me to a duel to prove myself?¡± The smile on Jude¡¯s face disappeared as Simon kept his gaze at him. Even Juno was surprised to see the challenging look on his brother¡¯s face. ¡°O-of course, not, cousin Simon!¡± Jude quickly replied with an awkward laugh. ¡°Jude, how could you act like that to our Kingdom¡¯s ¡®Hero¡¯?¡± asked his brother Prince Hayle before facing Simon. ¡°Don¡¯t mind him, cousin, it was just one of my brother¡¯s harmless jokes. I hope you don¡¯t take it against him?¡± ¡°O-of course not!¡± replied Simon, keeping his face straight as his heart kept pumping. He can¡¯t believe that he actually talked back to somebody! He was actually glad that Jude didn¡¯t take the challenge. ¡°I do hope we can go hunting together some other time,¡± he told them. ¡°Of course,¡± Prince Hayle replied. ¡°We shall be looking forward to that day.¡± Simon and his companions went straight to the banquet hall after that. Their entourage left the Twin Kingdoms as soon as the feast was through, and left for the capital just as the sun was traversing down the horizon. Later, the procession of carriages and knights on horseback reached past the Twin Kingdom¡¯s borders and entered the East Rim of the vast Twilight Forest. Simon watched the scene outside his window changed from a residential area, to fields of wheat, to an open field with the woods at the edge. He was starting to get sleepy, when the carriage they were riding suddenly came to a halt, hurling Simon towards the empty seat in front of him. ¡°Ouch! What was that?¡± he mumbled as he rubbed a carpet burn near his elbow. Simon looked out the windows. There were knights stationed on both sides of his carriage. ¡°What seems to be the problem?¡± Simon asked the knight to his right. ¡°There¡¯s a stalled cart in the middle of the road,¡± the knight replied. ¡°It seems to have broken it¡¯s axle. You may step out of your carriage if you wish, since this might take some time.¡± ¡°Oh, if you say so,¡± said Simon with a good stretch. ¡°Since the sun is about to go down, why don¡¯t we ask the wagoner to share some supper with us?¡± he added. The knight did not reply, instead, he watched as Simon opened the door to step out of the carriage. Something silver flickered at the corner of his eye as he alighted the carriage steps. Suddenly, the world was turning upside down. Simon found himself staring at the darkening sky as his body fell back from a push behind his legs! He saw another knight standing just behind the carriage¡¯s door. He was holding a long sword which he swiped at Simon ¨C he would have lost his head if he hadn¡¯t fallen backwards! He watched as the knight lifted the sword once more and aimed the tip at his chest! ¡°Do it quick!¡± the knight he talked to earlier snarled, pulling out his own sword. He never got it out of its scabbard, though, as another sword struck out from inside the carriage, severing his head. Simon heard himself scream. Warm blood splattered all over his body. Memories of his brothers at arms rushed pass across his eyes, filling his mind with memories of the massacre in the Dark Woods of Elenore.
Go to Part 37
Part 33 – I Forbid You to Leave Simon suddenly felt sadness and fear grip his chest. ¡°But... Nell, I need you!¡± he said, his eyes filling with tears. ¡°You are the first friend I have ever made, in fact, you are my only friend! What happens when I get hurt again? What if I get bullied? Who can I turn to, then?¡± Nell sighed and shook his head once more, but Simon held his shoulders tightly, his tears in torrents. ¡°Please, Nell, don¡¯t leave me! Didn¡¯t the high priest tell you to stay with me for a year? You can¡¯t just leave me now! I forbid you to leave!¡± Nell¡¯s veiled face stared at Simon for a long time. Finally, he heaved a heavy sigh and slowly nodded. ¡°Oh, thank you, Nell!¡± Simon exclaimed. ¡°Thank you so much! I promise, you won¡¯t regret this one bit! I¡¯ll make sure you never ask for anything! I¡¯ll share everything I have with you, I¡¯ll even give you an allowance from my own pocket money!¡± Simon kept fussing about as he told Nell all the plans he had and all the places he wished to visit together. He was so excited that he forgot that Nell was supposed to be healing him. Well, he didn¡¯t need any more healing, after all. Nell¡¯s holy power had completely taken all the damage and pain away from his body. He truly is an exceptional healer. Nell watched as his ward happily placed some clothes in his luggage. He couldn¡¯t help but shake his head slowly as he glared out the window and sighed. Simon and his brother Juno visited the kingdom of the West Twin the next morning. The citizens exulted him once more, throwing flowers upon his path and singing him praises. He waved at the crowd as he passed, his face shining with pride. Even more people welcomed him as their entourage entered the West palace. A choir of children sang of his glory, while performers danced around them. There were even trained beasts who lowered their heads as he passed by. King Maurice Jobert Krems of the ¡°Welcome, dear nephew!¡± he said with a wide grin on his bearded face. ¡°I welcome the Twin Kingdom¡¯s Hero into my humble abode!¡± ¡°I am most delighted with your invitation, your majesty, King Maurice,¡± replied Simon with a deep bow. ¡°Oh, please drop the formalities, just call me Uncle Maurice!¡± said the King with a loud laugh. ¡°T-then, I thank you for the invite, Uncle Maurice,¡± Simon said with a shy smile. This was the first time he had seen this uncle up close. Stolen story; please report. ¡° ¡°It is a pleasure to meet you all,¡± said Simon, bowing himself. ¡°The pleasure is ours, oh, great hero,¡± replied the West Twin Kingdom¡¯s eldest, Prince Hayle.¡± He looked about the same age as Largos, and acted the same, with the same sarcastic tone. ¡°For today¡¯s special guest, we had prepared a hunt in the Royal Woods,¡± said the king as they led Simon further inside the palace and out a back door, towards a vast open area. ¡°Alas, your father informed me that you cannot stay too long since you would be leaving for the capital later this afternoon?¡± ¡°I¡¯m afraid that¡¯s right, Uncle Maurice,¡± Simon replied. ¡°We¡¯re supposed to leave for the capital soon, since the Emperor had summoned me there.¡± ¡°Ah, but isn¡¯t that such a shame?¡± said Prince Hayle with a disappointed look on his face. ¡°We were so looking forward to seeing the Twin Kingdom¡¯s Hero in action!¡± ¡°I guess so,¡± said Simon, feeling relieved, ¡°perhaps we can do that some other time, when we return from the capital.¡± ¡°Then why not hold a small hunting game instead?¡± Prince Jude suggested. ¡°A small hunting game?¡± asked Simon. He has never gone hunting before, since his father only brings his brothers Juno and Largos when he wants to go hunting. ¡°I¡¯m afraid we don¡¯t have enough time for that, right, brother Juno?¡± he asked his brother who has been very quiet since they left their castle. ¡°Of course we do!¡± Prince Juno replied, standing next to Prince Hayle. ¡°We still have more than enough time to spare.¡± ¡°We do?¡± Simon felt a bit nervous, thinking what his uncle King Maurice and his cousins might want him to do. ¡°Good, shall we head to the enclosed garden, then?¡± asked Prince Hayle, his smile widening. ¡°A-actually, I don¡¯t think I can show you my best right now!¡± Simon blurted out. ¡°I haven¡¯t recovered my strength, yet, and I might injure myself further if I force myself to do something I¡¯m not used to.¡± He was hesitant, since all he had ever handled before, was a simple composite bow and arrow. ¡°Oh, but I thought you said, you¡¯re feeling much better already?¡± his brother Juno asked him in a sarcastic tone. ¡°Isn¡¯t that the reason why our Father decided to send you to the capital immediately?¡± ¡°W-well, that¡¯s true, b-but... I really haven¡¯t recovered all my strength yet...¡± Simon insisted. ¡°I-I mean, I might look fine on the outside, but I still have internal injuries and might weaken further if I tire myself out!¡± ¡°Really? Is that all the new ¡®Hero¡¯ is capable of?¡± Simon felt his face burn, even though Prince Jude gave a little laugh to pass his comment as a joke. ¡°I-I¡¯m sorry, I guess I¡¯m not the hero you expected,¡± he mumbled, his head held low, ¡°but I am still the hero none the less.¡± Simon raised his head and looked straight at his cousin. ¡°I did get rid of the behemoth, after all, or do you perhaps think that I was just making all those things up?¡± The smile on Jude¡¯s face disappeared as Simon stared at him. Even Juno was surprised to see the challenging look on his brother¡¯s face. ¡°O-of course, not, cousin Simon!¡± he quickly replied with an awkward laugh. ¡°Jude, how could you say that to our Kingdom¡¯s ¡®Hero¡¯?¡± asked his brother Prince Hayle before facing Simon. ¡°Don¡¯t mind him, cousin, it was just a harmless joke. I hope you don¡¯t take it against him?¡± ¡°O-of course not!¡± replied Simon, keeping his face straight as his heart kept pumping. He can¡¯t believe that he actually talked back to somebody! ¡°I do hope we can go hunting together some other time.¡± ¡°Of course,¡± Prince Hayle replied. ¡°We shall be looking forward to that day.¡± Simon and his companions went straight to the banquet hall after that. They had a small feast and left shortly after to leave for the Capital. ¡°There would be other chances to use that crossbow,¡± he told Nell as he recounted the events during his visit in the other kingdom. ¡°I bet I could learn to use one when we get to the University,¡± he went on with a big smile, ¡°then, I can go hunting with my cousins when we return during summer vacation!¡± Nell gave a curt nod. ¡°Would you like to learn with me?¡± he asked the novice priest. Nell placed his two index fingers together, making an ¡®X¡¯. ¡°Oh, are you perhaps thinking that you won¡¯t be able to join me since you¡¯re not a student?¡± Simon asked him. ¡°I can take you with me as my attendant. Even brother Juno has Rode and two knights with him to act as his attendants. He took Rode back since I told him that I only needed you to stay with me.¡± Nell sighed and shrugged. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, there won¡¯t be much for you to do as my attendant. You just need to accompany me during my classes!¡± Nell gave another sigh. Soon, the procession of carriages and knights on horseback reached past the Twin Kingdom¡¯s borders and entered the East Rim of the vast Twilight Forest. Simon was still chattering happily, when the carriage they were riding came to a sudden halt, hurling Simon towards Nell who was sitting right in front of him. ¡°Ouch! What happened?¡± asked Simon. Nell looked out of the windows. Simon did the same and saw knights at either side of their carriage. ¡°What seems to be the problem?¡± Simon asked the knight to their right. ¡°There¡¯s a stalled cart in the middle of the road,¡± said the knight. ¡°The cart in front seems to have broken its axle. You may step out of your carriage if you wish, since this might take some time.¡± ¡°Oh, if you say so,¡± said Simon. ¡°It would be nice to have a good stretch, right Nell?¡± Nell didn¡¯t reply. Simon opened the carriage door. He held on to the door handle and bowed his head to get off the carriage, when he noticed something silver flickering down towards him. He was suddenly pulled back inside unceremoniously. ¡°Wha-what happened?!¡± Simon asked Nell who held him by his collar. The left carriage door flung open. He was surprised to see a bearded knight enter the carriage, brandishing a sword in his hand.
Go to Part 38
PART 34 – A Walk in The Garden The small group walked farther into the garden. The hedges where higher there, reaching to their chest, in a miniature labyrinth with a fountain in the middle. Little Rose ran straight for the fountain as soon as she saw it, followed by Princess Fay, both seemed enchanted by the flowering lilies that were floating on the glittering water. ¡°This garden is very lovely, Prince Simon,¡± said Princess Tina in an attempt at conversation. ¡°Yes, it is,¡± replied Simon. ¡°I had no idea there was such a place here in the royal palace...¡± Princess Tina kept her poise, yet looked at him slightly from the corner of her eye. ¡°Is this your first time here as well?¡± she asked Simon. ¡°Yes, since I am the 9th prince, and was not allowed to enter the main palace before.¡± ¡°I heard you were sent by your brothers to subdue the behemoth, with only 500 soldiers to aid you?¡± Lady June inquired. ¡°Yes, that is correct,¡± Simon said with an awkward smile. Unauthorized usage: this narrative is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings. ¡°So, they basically sent you to your death?¡± ¡°L-Lady June!¡± Princess Tina looked at June, horrified. ¡°How could you talk to his royal highness that way?!¡± ¡°I-it¡¯s fine... it is the truth, after all,¡± Simon said bashfully. ¡°Be that as it may, you are still the Kingdom¡¯s hero and deserve only our respect!¡± Simon smiled at Princess Tina. ¡®If only everyone would think that way,¡¯ he found himself thinking. ¡®Particularly, the people in the Empire...¡¯ ¡°By the way, aren¡¯t you cousins?¡± Lady June suddenly asked. ¡°W-we are?¡± Simon asked Lady Tina, surprised. ¡°We are second cousins,¡± Princess Fay admitted, joining their conversation while Lady Rose continued to play in the water. ¡°Our parents are cousins,¡± Princess Tina explained, holding on to Simon¡¯s right arm, ¡°but that is not an issue, since nobility have always been keeping the blood pure by marrying within the family,¡± she said proudly. ¡°Isn¡¯t that right, Prince Simon?¡± Princess Fay smiled sweetly, her long lashes fluttering. Simon didn¡¯t know what to say. ¡°You can choose any of us,¡± Tina said, holding on to Simon¡¯s other arm. ¡°Or you can choose us both,¡± Fay added. ¡°But first, you would need to choose which one of us would be declared as your queen and main wife,¡± Tina concluded. Simon felt his face turn hot. He tried to pull away from the two princesses, but both held on tighter to his arms. ¡°I... I¡¯m afraid I can¡¯t choose right now...¡± he finally told them.
CHOICES: [I will have to decide when I get much older] go to Part 35 [I shall let my father decide.] go to Part 36
Part 35 – I’ll Decide When I’m Older ¡°I... I¡¯m afraid I can¡¯t choose right now...¡± he told the sisters. ¡°We have just met each other and I hardly know you... I think it would be better if we get more acquainted first. Perhaps when I get much older...?¡± Simon kept his gaze low, his fingers twiddling, afraid he might insult the princesses, when he suddenly heard someone laugh. He looked up and saw Lady June staring at him with interest. ¡°That¡¯s right, Princess Tina,¡± she addressed the eldest in their company. ¡°How could you ask a child such a question?¡± Simon felt his face burn at being called a child. ¡°And Princess Fay, why do you act bolder than your older sister? Don¡¯t tell me you have more experience than the two of us combined?¡± ¡°H-how vulgar!¡± Princess Fay replied, covering her mouth with a handkerchief. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I¡¯ll make the choice easier by backing out of the race,¡± continued Lady June, ¡°I have no plans of getting married,¡± she told them. ¡°I have a lot of dreams and aspirations, and being tied to a man is not one of them.¡± That night, Simon couldn¡¯t help but think of what Lady June told them. ¡°I wonder what Lady June¡¯s dreams are?¡± he found himself asking the darkness that filled his spacey new bedroom. He had these thoughts in mind until he fell asleep and was woken quite early the next day for their luncheon with the West Twin¡¯s Royalties. ¡°Good morning, Nell! I am ready for my healing session now,¡± he greeted the healer as soon as he entered his quarters. ¡°How do you like your new room? I asked the servants to prepare the one right next to mine, did you sleep well?¡± Nell nodded at him. ¡°Did you see the clothes I sent you?¡± Nell sat on a chair in front of him, clasping his left hand as the healing session began. ¡°I hope the clothes are still fine, I¡¯ll buy you better ones when we get to the capital!¡± Nell¡¯s head slightly tilted. ¡°I hope you haven¡¯t placed the clothes inside your dresser yet, since we¡¯ll be leaving for the capital later this afternoon,¡± he continued excitedly. ¡°My father had decided to send me to the Royal Maralict Imperial University, but before that, I would need to greet his Imperial Highness, Emperor Jonas Maralictof the Holy Maralict Empire, first.¡± Nell¡¯s head suddenly rose to stare at Simon. Simon saw a glimpse of his honey brown eyes beneath his mask. They were wide open, while his pink lips, formed a small ¡®o¡¯ of surprise. ¡°Are you excited as well?¡± he asked his friend. ¡°I have always wanted to study in a proper school, but to think that Father would enroll me into the Royal Maralict Imperial University! It is a dream come true for me! In fact, I¡¯m still worried that I might suddenly wake up and find out that I¡¯ve only been dreaming!¡± Nell watched Simon laugh gleefully. He gave a deep sigh, then shook his head. ¡°Is there something wrong, Nell?¡± Simon asked him. Nell lifted his right hand and waved at him. ¡°Why are you waving?¡± Simon asked, his head tilted. ¡°Are you waving goodbye?¡± Ensure your favorite authors get the support they deserve. Read this novel on Royal Road. Nell let go of his hand all together. He pointed at Simon, then raised both arms to flex his muscles. ¡°Are you saying that I am already strong to leave on my own?¡± Nell nodded, then waved goodbye once again. ¡°Then, do you mean, that I don¡¯t need you anymore?¡± Nell gave him another nod. Simon suddenly felt lost and sad. ¡°But I was planning to see the whole Empire with you!¡± Nell shook his head once more. He clasped his hands together in prayer, and waved goodbye yet again. ¡°But... Nell, I need you!¡± Simon said, his eyes filling with tears. ¡°You are the first friend I have ever made, in fact, you are my only friend! And I just want to share my good fortune with you!¡± Nell was about to shake his head again, when Simon grabbed hold of his hand and grasped it tightly to his chest. ¡°Please, Nell, please? Can you at least stay with me for one year like the head priest said?¡± Nell¡¯s veiled face stared at Simon. He seemed to be thinking. Finally, he sighed and looked down, and slowly nodded. ¡°Oh, thank you, Nell!¡± Simon exclaimed. ¡°Thank you so much! I promise, you won¡¯t regret this one bit! I¡¯ll make sure you¡¯re comfortable all the way, and will share with you, all the good things that will come my way!¡± Simon kept fussing about as he told Nell all the plans he had and all the places he wished to visit together. He was so excited that he forgot that Nell was supposed to be healing him. Well, he didn¡¯t need any more healing, after all. Nell¡¯s holy power had completely taken all the damage and pain away from his body. He is truly an exceptional healer, after all. Nell watched as his ward happily placed some clothes in his luggage. He couldn¡¯t help but shake his head slowly as he looked out the window and sighed. The Hero¡¯s entourage left the Twin Kingdoms that afternoon, just as the sun was traversing down the horizon. Simon and his brother Juno visited the kingdom of the West Twin earlier, but they didn¡¯t stay long. King Morel Jacob Krems and his eldest sons, Prince Hayle and Prince June, wanted to have a small hunting game with him, but he declined the offer. He couldn''t wait to visit the capital with Nell, after all. Besides, he has never gone hunting before. Only his majesties, the kings of the Twin Kingdoms, and their two first born sons, were allowed to participate in such events. He also found the crossbow they showed him quite complicated. All he had ever used before was a simple composite bow and arrow. ¡°There would be other chances to use that crossbow,¡± he told Nell as he recounted the events of his visit to his healer. ¡°I bet we could use one when we get to the University,¡± he said with a smile, ¡°we can learn how to use it together!¡± Nell placed his two index fingers together, making an ¡®X¡¯. ¡°Oh, are you thinking that you can¡¯t learn with me since you¡¯re not a student?¡± Simon said for him. ¡°I plan to take you with me as my attendant. Even brother Juno has Rode and two other knights with him to act as his attendants. He took him back when I told him that I only needed you to stay with me.¡± Nell gave a sigh of defeat. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I¡¯m used to taking care of myself!¡± Simon assured him. ¡°I just called you my attendant so that we could stay in the same room, but I promise not to make you do any work on my behalf!¡± Nell gave another sigh. Soon, the procession of carriages and knights on horseback reached past the Twin Kingdom¡¯s borders and entered the East Rim of the vast Twilight Forest. Simon was still chattering happily with Nell, when the carriage they were riding on suddenly came to a halt, hurling Simon towards Nell who was sitting right in front of him. He heard a sharp yelp as Nell held his arms out and caught him before he fell. ¡°Ouch! What happened?¡± asked Simon. Nell looked out of the carriage windows. Simon did the same and saw two knights at either side of their vehicle. ¡°What seems to be the problem?¡± Simon asked the knight to their left. ¡°There¡¯s a cart in the middle of the road,¡± said the knight in a gruff voice. He was wearing a visor, but Simon noticed his thick, dark brown beard. He recognized him as one of the knights that accompanied them back from Weezer Village. ¡°Your highness,¡± called the knight to the right of the carriage, ¡°the cart seems to have broken it¡¯s axle. You may step out of your carriage if you wish, since this might take some time.¡± ¡°Oh, if you say so,¡± said Simon. ¡°It would be nice to have a good stretch, right Nell?¡± Nell gave him a nod. ¡°Since the sun is about to go down, why don¡¯t we ask the wagoner to share some supper with us?¡± he added. Simon opened the carriage door and was about to step out, when his clothes got snagged on something, pulling him back inside. He suddenly noticed something silver shine pass the door with a whooshing sound. ¡°Wha-¡± Simon coughed, ¡°what happened?!¡± he asked Nell who held him by his collar. The left carriage door flung open. He was surprised to see the bearded knight entering the carriage with his sword in hand. ¡°W-what are you doing?!¡± Simon shouted, trying to cover himself with his frail arms. He was even more surprised when Nell aimed a kick at the armored knight! It hardly did any damage. The knight glared down at the healer, raising his shiny blade. Without thinking, Simon threw himself over the novice priest, just as the knight¡¯s arm rushed down upon them.
Go to Part 39
Part 36 – I’ll Let Father Decide ¡°I... I¡¯m afraid I can¡¯t choose right now...¡± he told them. ¡°I would need to consult my father about that first. He would know what is best for me and the kingdom.¡± ¡°Can you at least tell us who like best?¡± Princess Fay pouted at him cutely. ¡°Fay, can¡¯t you see that you are troubling his highness Prince Simon?¡± her sister scolded her. Fay gave a bubbly laugh. ¡°I merely wanted to know who among the four of us is most likely to win the Hero¡¯s heart!¡± she said playfully. ¡°Don¡¯t you feel the same, Lady June?¡± ¡°Speak for yourself.¡± The three looked at June. She was staring at Simon, her eyes full of disgust. ¡°If you can¡¯t make decisions on your own, then you don¡¯t deserve any concubines.¡± Princess Tina gasped. ¡°Are you saying that Prince Simon does not deserve to be a King? Since only the King can keep concubines?!¡± ¡°Stop putting words inside my mouth, Princess,¡± Lady June coldly replied. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I¡¯ll make the choice easier by backing out of the race,¡± she continued. ¡°I have no plans of binding myself to a man who can¡¯t think for himself.¡± That night, Simon couldn¡¯t help but think of what Lady June told them. ¡°Am I really a man who can¡¯t think for himself?¡± he asked the darkness that filled his spacey new bedroom. He had these thoughts in mind until he fell asleep and was woken quite early the next day for their luncheon with the West Twin¡¯s Royalties. ¡°Nell! I am ready for my healing session now,¡± he greeted the healer as soon as he entered his room. ¡°How do you like the new room I gave you? I asked the servants to prepare the room right next to mine, did you sleep well?¡± Nell nodded at him. ¡°Were the clothes I gave you still okay?¡± he asked as he sat on his bed. Nell sat on a chair in front of him, clasping his left hand as the healing session began. ¡°I hope the clothes are still fine, I¡¯ll buy you better ones when we get to the capital!¡± Nell¡¯s head slightly tilted. ¡°I hope you haven¡¯t placed the clothes inside your dresser yet, since we¡¯ll be leaving for the capital later this afternoon.¡± he continued excitedly. ¡°My father had decided to send me to the Royal Maralict Imperial University, but before that, I would need to greet his Imperial Highness, Emperor Jonas Maralict of the Holy Maralict Empire first.¡± Nell¡¯s head suddenly rose to stare at Simon. Simon saw a glimpse of his honey brown eyes beneath his mask. They were wide open, while his pink lips, formed a small ¡®o¡¯ of surprise. The narrative has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the infringement. ¡°Are you excited as well?¡± he asked his friend. ¡°I have always wanted to study in a proper school, but to think that Father would enroll me to the Royal Maralict Imperial University! It is a dream come true for me! In fact, I¡¯m still worried that I might suddenly wake up and find out that I¡¯ve only been dreaming!¡± Nell watched Simon laugh gleefully. He gave a sigh and shook his head. ¡°Is there something wrong, Nell?¡± Simon asked him. Nell lifted his right hand and waved at him. ¡°Why are you waving?¡± Simon asked, his head tilted. ¡°Are you waving goodbye?¡± Nell let go of his hand all together. He pointed at Simon, then raised both arms to flex his muscles. ¡°Are you saying that I am already strong to leave on my own?¡± Nell nodded, then waved goodbye once again. ¡°Then, do you mean, that I don¡¯t need you anymore?¡± Nell gave him another nod. Simon suddenly felt agitated. ¡°But... Nell, I need you!¡± he said, his eyes filling with tears. ¡°You are the first friend I have ever made, in fact, you are my only friend! What would happen of I get hurt again? What if I get bullied? Who can I turn to, then?¡± Nell sighed and was about to shake his head again, when Simon held his shoulders tightly, his tears in torrents. ¡°Please, Nell, don¡¯t leave me! Didn¡¯t the high priest tell you to stay with me for a year? You can¡¯t just leave me now!¡± Nell¡¯s veiled face stared at Simon for a long time, then he shook his head once more, this time, harder. ¡°Can¡¯t I... can¡¯t I change your mind anymore?¡± he asked one last time. Again, Nell shook his head, before touching Simon¡¯s hand more to continue their healing session. ¡°I guess this is the last time I get healed by you, then?¡± Simon asked sadly. Nell reached out a hand to path his left shoulder. ¡°Then... I should and shall thank you with all my heart.¡± Simon tried his best to show his best smile, but ended up with a grimace instead. ¡°Thank you for everything, Nell,¡± he told the novice priest. ¡°I shall tell the servants to pack all my gifts for you. You may leave anytime you choose.¡± The Hero¡¯s entourage left the Twin Kingdoms that afternoon, just as the sun was traversing down the horizon. Simon and his brother Juno visited the kingdom of the West Twin earlier, but they didn¡¯t stay long. King Morel Jacob Krems and his eldest sons, Prince Hayle and Prince June, wanted to have a small hunting game with him, but he declined the offer. He couldn''t wait to visit the capital, after all. Besides, he has never gone hunting before. Only his majesties, the Kings of the Twin Kingdoms, and their two first born sons were allowed to participate in such events. He was also scared to use the crossbow they were so proud of, when all he had ever handled before, was a simple composite bow and arrow. Soon, the procession of carriages and knights on horseback reached past the Twin Kingdom¡¯s borders and entered the East Rim of the vast Twilight Forest. Simon was starting to get sleepy, when the carriage they were riding suddenly came to a halt, hurling him towards the empty seat in front of him. He heard a sharp yelp as he fell. ¡°Ouch! What was that?¡± he mumbled as he rubbed the carpet burn near his right elbow. Simon looked out of the carriage windows and saw two knights at either side of their vehicle. ¡°What seems to be the problem?¡± Simon asked the knight to his right. ¡°There¡¯s a stalled cart in the middle of the road,¡± said the knight, ¡°it seems to have broken it¡¯s axle. You may step out of your carriage if you wish, since this might take some time.¡± ¡°Oh, if you say so, it would be nice to have a good stretch for a bit,¡± said Simon. ¡°Since the sun is about to go down, why don¡¯t we ask the wagoner to share some supper with us?¡± he added. Simon was about to open the carriage door, when he noticed the seat in front of him rise slightly. ¡°What the...¡± Simon looked at it closer. He was about to lift the cushion up, when the left carriage door suddenly flung open! He was surprised to see a bearded knight enter the carriage with a sword in his hand! ¡°W-what are you doing?!¡± Simon fell back on his seat and tried to move away from the armed knight. He was even more surprised when the seat in front of him suddenly burst open, revealing a cloaked person from inside! The knight¡¯s gaze fell on the cloaked image, then at the door opposite that flew open. Simon threw his arms over his head as the bearded knight raised his sword.
Go to Part 40
Part 37 – The God of Death Blood splattered over Simon¡¯s body as the knight¡¯s severed head fell on his lap. He felt a chill crawl down his spine as images of the behemoth slaughtering his brothers in arms replayed in his mind. ¡°Boy, grab that blade, quick!¡± he heard someone command him. He looked up and saw a bearded knight¡¯s face looking out from inside the carriage. ¡°Grab that blade and protect yourself, you idiot!¡± he repeated. Hands shaking, he took the fallen knight¡¯s sword, just in time as another knight appeared from behind their carriage. Simon raised to his knees, still half out of his wits, and rammed the sword at the incoming knight. --- ¡°What¡¯s happening now?¡± Juno asked his ward Rode. ¡°I can¡¯t see clearly, your highness,¡± the butler replied. ¡°I saw Prince Simon fall off his wagon earlier, while a bearded knight killed two of the other knights... now, your brother Simon and that bearded knight are fighting the ones coming from behind,¡± he reported. ¡°I can¡¯t see the rest of the fight, since their carriage is blocking the way...¡± ¡°Eli, Trix,¡± Juno called to the two knights attending him outside his carriage, ¡°go look at the situation,¡± he ordered. ¡°Go see if the ¡®hero¡¯ is as heroic as he claims to be. --- ¡°Parry down low!¡± yelled the bearded knight. Simon was just in time to block a knight¡¯s blade that was meant to knock him off his feet. ¡°Now up!¡± Simon raised his blade up to stop a sword rushing down on his right shoulder. ¡°Left! Now right!¡± Simon parried left and right. He couldn¡¯t believe he was actually fighting with knights from the kingdom! The narrative has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the infringement. Back when he was still in training, his brothers would laugh at him as he dragged his bastard sword around. They would push him and trip him and kick him on the ground for being such a weakling that could hardly raise his weapon of choice. ¡°Now, forward!¡± Simon thrust his blade forward. He felt a slight resistance as his sword went through metal and stabbed into flesh. ¡®So, this is what it feels to tear through flesh,¡¯ he thought deep inside, his mind slightly fogged, as his body followed the bearded knight¡¯s every command. The knight in front of him fell on his knees, gasping. Simon let his blade drop as the body before him fell on the ground. ¡°Good,¡± he heard the bearded knight say. ¡°Now rest.¡± --- ¡°Simon!¡± Simon heard another voice. He turned his body around, his eyes wide open, his face pale as death. ¡°Are you alright, little brother!?¡± It was his brother, Prince Juno who went close to him and knelt by his side. ¡°What happened here? Are you alright? Are you hurt anywhere?¡± Simon stared as his brother. Scenes of blood and carnage from the Dark Forest was again, passing in front of his eyes, but here, now, is his beloved eldest brother, ready to save him. ¡°B-brother Juno!¡± Simon suddenly burst out crying. ¡°Brother... these men... they just suddenly attacked me!¡± ¡°But aren¡¯t these our loyal knights?¡± Juno asked in feigned disbelief. ¡°Your highness, they seem to be different men,¡± said one of Juno¡¯s personal knights. ¡°Is that so, Eli?¡± Juno¡¯s forehead creased. ¡°Are you sure?¡± ¡°Yes, your highness,¡± replied the other. ¡°Perhaps they are impostors dressed up as knights of the Twin Kingdoms to betray us!¡± ¡°Trix, Eli, check the rest of the knights!¡± Juno ordered the two. ¡°Make sure there are no other traitors left alive!¡± ¡°At once, your highness!¡± replied the two. Juno looked with disgust at the young man trembling in his arms. ¡®I can¡¯t believe this bastard actually killed three of my best men!¡¯ he thought to himself. ¡®I have been secretly training those knights for years! It should have been impossible for this worm to even defeat one of them! So how...¡¯ Juno bolted upright as he felt a cold stare full of malice from behind him. He quickly turned his head and looked around, but there was nobody there but Trix and Eli. It seems the bearded knight he saw earlier has left the scene. Perhaps he decided to leave after Simon went berserk. That¡¯s right, berserk was the best way to describe it. How else could a flimsy worm be able to win against five of his men? He did instruct his secret knights to turn coats as soon as they confirmed that Simon really does have some kind of power, and it seems that this power he holds is of supernatural origin indeed. He could still remember the look on his brother¡¯s face as he sat on the ground earlier, surrounded by the dead bodies of three of his knights. It was as if he wore a death mask. A face without fear of death or killing. A face devoid of any life. Even the body he is currently embracing is as cold as ice. ¡®It seems that I can¡¯t just simply get rid of this bastard now,¡¯ he thought to himself. ¡®I guess Largos was right. Perhaps a god really is watching over him...¡¯ he considered. ¡®And I wouldn¡¯t be surprised if that god is the god of death himself.¡¯
Go to Part 41
Part 38 – Some Hero ¡°W-what are you doing?!¡± Simon shouted, trying to cover himself with his frail arms. He was shocked when Nell aimed a kick at the armored knight! It hardly did any damage. The knight simply glared down at the two of them and raised his blade into the air. Simon cowered beneath Nell just as the knight¡¯s arm rushed down upon them. ¡°S-save me!¡± he screamed, his eyes, tightly closed. He waited for the bearded knight¡¯s attack, but it never came. Cautiously, he opened his eyes to peek at the situation. It seems that the bearded knight wasn¡¯t aiming at them, after all. He had his right arm outstretched with his left foot inside the carriage. The tip of his sword was buried deep inside the skull of the knight standing by the right door. ¡°Ahhh!¡± Simon screamed, as memory of his fallen brothers at arms filled his head. He watched as the stabbed knight fell out of their carriage and another take his place. This knight also had his sword drawn, and he parried the blade of the bearded knight, causing the latter to step out of the carriage once more. The new knight entered the carriage then, looked down at Simon, and pulled his sword back to stab him. Simon gave another scream, but the sword never found its target. He was suddenly tumbling out the carriage with Nell. The two of them fell on the dusty ground with a thud. The knight¡¯s blade went through the carriage seat and got stuck. He tried to pull it out, but the bearded knight was suddenly at him, slashing him at the chest. There were three more coming up from behind their carriage now. ¡°W-we... we need to get out of here!¡± Simon finally got to say as Nell helped him stand to his feet. He looked ahead of the procession, towards Prince Juno¡¯s carriage, dreading the worst and hoping against hope that his older brother was safe, when he saw two knights rushing to their aid. ¡°Those are brother Juno¡¯s knights!¡± he told Nell when he recognized them. ¡°We should ask for their help!¡± Simon ran towards the two, but Nell pulled him back once more. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, those are my brother¡¯s knights!¡± he assured him. ¡°They are here to¨C¡± Simon turned around just in time to see one of the knights pull out his sword and aim it at his chest. ¡°H-Help!¡± Simon stumbled back. He tried to raise himself, but he was so filled with dread that he could hardly move. He was shivering on the ground, the knight, charging at him, when Nell tried to pull him up again. ¡®That¡¯s right!¡¯ Simon said to himself. ¡®I have Nell here to save me!¡¯ Thinking that, he was able to raise himself, but in his fright, he stumbled and pushed Nell towards the advancing charger. Simon saw Nell¡¯s surprised expression when the veil covering his face lifted up as he fell. It was full of disbelief and anger. ¡°I-I¡¯m sorry!¡± Simon yelled as he turned his back to run. He heard the crack of bone as the knight on his charger trampled over the novice priest¡¯s body. He tried to block it out, tried to erase Nell¡¯s outraged look when he pushed him. He tried to run and hide beneath the carriage to save his miserable life. But he couldn¡¯t do any of these things. The image of Nell stayed frozen in his mind¡¯s eye. The sound of his bones breaking, repeated again and again in his ears. Soon, he felt the cold steel of the traitor knight¡¯s blade upon his back as he tried to crawl beneath the carriage. ¡°Hmph. Some hero you are!¡± he heard the knight¡¯s contemptuous voice. ¡°Some hero.¡± And that voice and that face stayed in that ¡®hero¡¯s¡¯ mind until he breathed his last pathetic breath.
bad ending ??
The story has been illicitly taken; should you find it on Amazon, report the infringement. and frankly, you deserved it. Part 39 – Off a Cliff ¡°Look out!¡± Simon yelled as he jumped at Nell to cover him from the bearded Knight¡¯s attack. The two of them fell prone on Nell¡¯s seat. Simon kept his eyes closed, thinking that the knight could easily stab through the both of them, but the strike never came. He cautiously opened an eye to peek at the situation and was pushed aside by Nell instead. The bearded knight wasn¡¯t aiming at them, after all. He had his right arm outstretched, his left foot, inside the carriage, and the tip of his long sword, buried deep inside the skull of the knight from the right carriage door. ¡°Ahhh!¡± Simon screamed, as memories of his fallen brothers at arms filled his mind. He watched as the stabbed knight fell out of the stalled carriage and another take his place. This knight also had his sword drawn, and he parried the blade of the bearded knight, causing the latter to step out of the carriage once more. The new knight entered the carriage then, looked down at Simon, and pulled his sword back to aim at him. Simon gave another scream, but the sword never found its target for he was suddenly tumbling out the carriage as Nell pulled at him. Both fell on the dusty ground with a thud. The knight¡¯s blade went through the carriage seat and got stuck. He tried to pull it out, but the bearded knight was suddenly at him, slashing him at the chest. He was about to deliver the finishing blow then the wounded knight finally pulled his bloodied sword out and parried him. There were three more coming up from behind them. ¡°W-we... we need to get out of here!¡± Simon finally got to say as he helped Nell up from beneath him. He looked ahead of the procession, towards his brother, Prince Juno¡¯s carriage, dreading the worst, and hoping against hope that his older brother was fine. This tale has been unlawfully obtained from Royal Road. If you discover it on Amazon, kindly report it. It was then that he saw his brother¡¯s personal knights rushing to their aid. ¡°Those are brother Juno¡¯s knights!¡± he told Nell when he recognized them. ¡°We should ask for their help!¡± Simon ran towards the two, but Nell pulled him back ¨C just in time as a blade narrowly missed his neck. ¡°Get back inside the carriage, boys!¡± the bearded knight called to them. Simon looked back and saw several fallen knights around him. ¡°Hurry up and get in, damn it!¡± the knight yelled at him. Nell pulled at Simon once more as the knight leapt past them to intercept the two knights on horseback. They hurried back inside the carriage as the bearded knight instructed, and pulled the doors closed. The two huddled on the floor, listening to the sound of fighting outside. Later, it fell quiet, and they were suddenly jostled inside as the carriage started to move, the horses neighing wildly. Nell knelt on the front seat to peep through the window and saw the bearded knight up front. ¡°W-wait! We can¡¯t leave yet, my brother Juno is still there!¡± exclaimed Simon as he peered outside the back window. They had just passed his brother¡¯s carriage and had barged their way through the stalled cart. ¡°We need to help brother Juno escape, too!¡± Simon, half mad with worry, opened the carriage door and tried to jump out of it. It was a good thing that Nell pulled him back by the scruff of his neck! The carriage was going faster, and trying to jump off would mean his death! ¡°Please! I can¡¯t just leave my brother behind!¡± Simon insisted. Nell raised his hand and slapped him across the face. ¡°You idiot!¡± he yelled with a slight accent. That seemed to have brought Simon back to his senses. Nell pulled him up the back seat, made him kneel on the cushion, and swiveled his face outside the back window once again. ¡°Look outside and tell me what you see?!¡± he snapped at him. Simon did as he was told. His eyes widened as he saw the man leading the knights chasing them on horseback. He held a bow and arrow and was aiming at them. ¡°B-brother Juno...¡± he whispered in disbelief. ¡°Look out, you idiot!¡± Nell pulled Simon down once more as the arrow broke the window and whizzed past over their heads. Simon fell off the seat and gasped when his hands touched blood on the floor. It was probably from the knight that the bearded knight had killed earlier. But the knights outside... ¡°Why are my brother¡¯s knights trying to kill us?¡± he mumbled to himself. ¡°Isn¡¯t it obvious, you dolt?!¡± Nell yelled at him yet again. ¡°Did you really not see that bastard brother of yours aim an arrow at you?!?¡± ¡°But... but why would my brother want to kill ¨C ¡± Simon¡¯s words were cut short when the carriage encountered a big bump. The two passengers rose on their seats and heard the horses¡¯ cry, then felt a moment of weightlessness, before they started falling. The bearded knight had just driven the carriage off a steep cliff!
Go to Part 45
Part 40 – A Death Mask ¡°What is going on out here?!¡± asked the cloaked person in a shrill voice. ¡°W-who are you?!¡± Simon asked back, just as the bearded knight who barged inside the carriage door, stabbed another knight who came in from the door opposite! ¡°Woah!¡± the cloaked person pulled their hood back. ¡°Is this a mutiny?!¡± Simon stared, his jaw dropping. ¡°L-lady June?!¡± he asked the young lass in front of him. ¡°What are you doing underneath the seat?!¡± ¡°There¡¯s no time for that!¡± Lady June answered. ¡°Is there really a mutiny going on?¡± She sounded excited. ¡°I-I¡¯m not really sure...¡± replied Simon. He looked at the bearded knight, then at the other whose skull was currently pierced with a sword. Blood splattered at him as the bearded knight pulled his sword back. Simon felt a chill crawl down his spine as images of the behemoth slaughtering his brothers in arms filled his head. ¡°What are you staring at?¡± Lady June¡¯s authoritative voice snapped him out of his reverie. ¡°Boy, grab that blade, quick!¡± the bearded knight told him, pointing at the dead knight¡¯s fallen weapon. Simon¡¯s eyes widen as he recognized the voice. ¡°S-sir Will?¡± ¡°Grab that blade and protect yourself, you idiot!¡± the bearded knight repeated. Hands shaking, he took the knight¡¯s sword, just in time as another knight appeared from the right. From the floor, Simon raised his newly acquired weapon, stabbing upward with all his might. Blood dripped past the sword¡¯s pommel and down his shaking hands once it pierced through the tough leather covering the knight¡¯s neck. ¡°Now hurry up!¡± Simon scrambled to his feet and followed Sir Will out of the carriage. ¡°Three from behind the carriage!¡± he yelled at the young prince before running towards the incoming traitors. --- ¡°What¡¯s happening now?¡± Juno asked his attendant, Rode. ¡°I can¡¯t see clearly, your highness,¡± the butler replied. ¡°I just saw Prince Simon jump out of his wagon after killing two of the knights. He¡¯s running towards the others at the back with another knight trailing behind him... I can¡¯t view the rest of the fight, though, since their carriage is blocking the way...¡± If you discover this tale on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the violation. ¡°Eli, Trix, go look at the situation,¡± Juno told the two knights outside his carriage. ¡°Go see if the ¡®hero¡¯ is as heroic as he claims to be. --- ¡°Parry down low!¡± yelled Sir Will. Simon was just in time to block a knight¡¯s blade that was meant to knock him off his feet. ¡°Now up!¡± Simon raised his blade up to stop a sword rushing down on his right shoulder. ¡°Left! Now right!¡± Simon parried left and right. He couldn¡¯t believe he was actually fighting with knights from the kingdom! Back when he was still in training, his brothers would laugh at him as he dragged his bastard sword around. They would push him and trip him and kick him on the ground for being such a weakling that could hardly raise his weapon of choice. ¡°Now, forward!¡± Simon thrust his blade forward. He felt a slight resistance as his sword went through metal and stabbed into flesh once more. The knight in front of him fell on his knees. Gasping, Simon dropped his blade as the body before him fell on the ground. ¡°Good.¡± He heard Will commend him from afar. ¡°Now rest.¡± ¡°Simon!¡± Simon heard another voice. He turned his body around, his eyes open wide, his face pale as death. ¡°Are you alright, little brother!?¡± It was his brother, Prince Juno. He ran towards Simon, his arms wide open, and enveloped the younger prince in a tight embrace. ¡°What happened here? Are you alright? Are you hurt anywhere?¡± Simon stared as his brother. Scenes of blood and carnage from the Dark Forest were again, passing right before his eyes, but here, now, was his beloved eldest brother, ready to save him. ¡°B-brother Juno!¡± Simon suddenly burst out crying, dropping the blood stained sword he held on the ground. ¡°Brother... these men... they just suddenly attacked us!¡± ¡°But aren¡¯t these our loyal knights?¡± Juno asked in feigned disbelief. ¡°Your highness, they seem to be different men,¡± said one of Juno¡¯s personal knights. ¡°Is that so, Eli?¡± Juno¡¯s forehead creased. ¡°Are you sure?¡± ¡°Yes, your highness,¡± replied the other. ¡°Perhaps they are impostors dressed up as knights of the Twin Kingdoms to betray us!¡± ¡°Trix, Eli, check the rest of the knights!¡± Juno ordered the two. ¡°Make sure there are no other traitors left alive!¡± ¡°At once, your highness!¡± replied the two. Juno looked at the young man trembling in his arms in disgust. ¡®I can¡¯t believe this bastard actually killed five of my best men!¡¯ he thought to himself. ¡®I have been secretly training those knights for years! It should have been impossible for this worm to even defeat one of them! So how...¡¯ Juno bolted upright as he felt a cold stare full of malice from behind him. He quickly turned his head and looked around, but there was nobody there, only Eli, Trix, and one of his special knights who seem to have survived after Simon went berserk. That¡¯s right, berserk was the best way to describe it. How else could a flimsy worm be able to win against his men? It was a good thing that one of them remained, though. He did instruct his secret knights to turn coats as soon as they confirmed that Simon really does have some sort of power. It seems that this bearded one was quite perceptive, compared to the rest of his company. It also seems that this power his brother holds is of supernatural origin indeed. He could still remember the look on Simon¡¯s face when he turned around to meet him earlier. It was a death mask. A face without fear of death or killing. A face devoid of any life. Even the body he is currently embracing is as cold as ice. ¡®It seems that I can¡¯t just simply get rid of this bastard now,¡¯ he thought to himself. ¡®I guess Largos was right. Perhaps a god really is watching over him...¡¯ he considered. ¡®And I wouldn¡¯t be surprised if that god is the god of death himself.¡¯
Go to Part 46
Part 41 – The Question ‘Why’ ¡°Here¡¯s something to keep you warm, your highness.¡± Rode handed Simon a steaming cup of tea. He stared at it absentmindedly before reaching out both hands to hold it. The warmth gave little comfort to the coldness accumulating in his body. He was asking himself, why? Why is this happening? Why did those people ambush them? Why are they trying to kill the Twin Kingdom¡¯s Hero? And how did they infiltrate their group without anyone noticing? ¡°Are you sure you¡¯re okay, brother?¡± Prince Juno asked him once again. ¡°Why don¡¯t you have something to eat while the knights prepare your carriage?¡± Simon stared at his older brother, then at the food in front of them. Rode had propped up a table and prepared some stew and venison for them to dine upon. He hardly had an appetite, though. His brother¡¯s knights had checked the stalled cart in front of them. It seemed that some bandits had purposely placed the broken cart in the middle of the road to stall them, while their comrades, dressed as their escort knights, tried to kill them. ¡°It¡¯s a pity we couldn¡¯t make it to the nearest town since it¡¯s already dark,¡± his brother Juno told him. ¡°We couldn¡¯t even set our tents in fear that more bandits might attack us again. It would be better to spend the night inside our carriages and go to the nearest town first thing tomorrow morning. We can then send a message to Father and tell him what happened.¡± ¡°What happened...¡± Simon mumbled. ¡°What exactly did happen?¡± Juno gave his brother a worried glance. ¡°W-well, it seems to me, some secret faction is plotting against us...¡± Juno replied. ¡°I wouldn¡¯t be surprised if those knights were sent from the Western Twin Kingdom. They have a lot to lose, after all, with you, the Hero, coming from our side of the kingdom.¡± ¡°The Western Kingdom? But surely you jest... they were so warm when they welcomed us yesterday...¡± ¡°Simon, my dear, gullible brother,¡± Juno patted his shoulder and smiled. ¡°It is the people who welcome you with open arms that you should be most weary of!¡± ¡°B-but... why?¡± ¡°Haven¡¯t you heard of the right of succession?¡± Juno asked his sibling. ¡°If there are no twins, the first-born prince of each kingdom would inherit the throne, with the second oldest, acting as a spare and standing by in case the first-born dies or is proven inadequate.¡± ¡°I know, brother, but why are they trying to kill the both of us? Aren¡¯t they from the West? We have nothing to do with them.¡± ¡°It¡¯s because you suddenly became a Hero,¡± said Juno. ¡°In case a more fitting heir arrives, then the inadequate one will be pushed aside, and you know very well how competent I am as the crown prince.¡± ¡°Y-yes, that¡¯s true...¡± ¡°In the west, our cousin, first Prince Hayle, is known as an incompetent idiot who goes after his father, King Maurice. All he knows is how to drink, party, and hunt all day.¡± ¡°Incompetent idiot...¡± mumbled Simon. He remembered Prince Hayle and how much he insisted for them to go on a small hunting party the day they were about to leave for the capital. It seemed so long ago, though it was only yesterday. ¡°Then, Prince Hayle tried to get us killed?¡± he gazed at Juno and noticed his brother flinch. ¡°It may be so, Simon,¡± said Juno, gently squeezing his shoulder. ¡°Either that, or some neighboring country is trying to get rid of us so they can easily conquer the Twin Kingdoms,¡± he added. ¡°Or perhaps they were simply a group of bandits who were very unlucky.¡± Juno was left speechless by his brother¡¯s remark. ¡°I still can¡¯t believe that more than half of our escort knights were bandits.¡± Simon continued in a flat tone. ¡°I may not be that familiar with it, but they were all using the same swordsmanship as our family¡¯s royal knights.¡± Stolen from its original source, this story is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings. ¡°Well, the swordsmanship our knights use is pretty common in the kingdom, after all,¡± said Juno with a strained smile. ¡°Even their swords and their gear were the standard issued for our knights.¡± Simon continued to mumble. ¡°Probably stolen from our garrison, or worst, they probably killed our escorts and had taken their gear.¡± ¡°But if they were good enough to kill our knights... then how was I able to kill them?¡± For this question, Juno could give no answer. ¡°I have always been weak... you and brother Largos have always been telling me that, particularly when you see me practicing in the courtyard with my bastard sword.¡± ¡°Y-you were just too small to handle a sword that big...¡± Juno stuttered. ¡°You have always been so stubborn, saying that you only wish to use a bastard sword, just like the Golden Hero. Well, now that you¡¯ve tried using a regular sword, tell me, brother, which do you prefer?¡± Now it was Simon¡¯s turn to be silent. ¡°A regular sword is so much easier to use. It was so much lighter,¡± he finally replied. ¡°See what I mean?¡± Juno chuckled. ¡°It was so much easier to kill...¡± Again, Juno went silent as a chill passed down his spine. ¡°But I would rather use my bastard sword instead.¡± The two finished the rest of their meal in silence. --- Prince Simon¡¯s carriage remained still that night. Inside, Simon stared at the darkness. The curtains are all drawn close, though small beams of light passed through the cracks on the woodwork that reminded him that yesterday¡¯s bloody incident really did happen. A lot of questions are inside his mind, like, ¡®what¡¯s going on?¡¯, or ¡®who¡¯s trying to kill me?¡¯, and ¡®why do they want me dead?¡¯, but mostly, what he sees are the faces of the knights who tried to kill him. They were all dead now. Dead as the people who accompanied him to the Dark Woods of Elenore to defeat the Behemoth. ¡°Brother Juno said that there might be some secret faction plotting against us...¡± he mumbled in the dark. ¡°Could it really be Prince Hayle from the Western Twin Kingdom?¡± ¡°But Prince Hayle didn¡¯t look like someone who could plot against our Eastern kingdom,¡± he answered himself. ¡°In truth, I don¡¯t really think we would have any impact on their kingdom, unless twins are born from our family. I don¡¯t really believe what brother Juno said.¡± He sighed and shook his head. ¡°Then could another kingdom be plotting against us?¡± he asked again. ¡°But if that¡¯s the case, then why would they go to all the trouble of attacking us when we¡¯re leaving the kingdom?¡± he answered back. ¡°Wouldn¡¯t it be much better to attack our kingdom while my brother Juno, a tactician, and I, the hero, are both away?¡± ¡°And then, there¡¯s the possibility that they were merely bandits...¡± Simon frowned. ¡°But what kind of bandit would think of attacking a Hero who just defeated a Behemoth?¡± Simon gave a deep sigh. ¡°There¡¯s also the fact that they were able to disguise themselves as my brother¡¯s knights... How could those knights not recognize their own comrades? How is it that only the bearded knight was not a bandit? And how could my brother simply let a group of unknown knights accompany us to the capital?¡± ¡°Could it be then, that someone close to brother Juno has been orchestrating everything behind our backs?¡± ¡°But who?¡± ¡°Who would benefit most if my brother and I were to die?¡± ¡°Or am I not asking the right questions?¡± --- Simon wasn¡¯t the only one who asking a lot of questions that night. Juno felt ill at ease as he entered his carriage with Rode. ¡°Did you talk with that bearded knight who was left?¡± he asked his attendant. ¡°Yes, your highness.¡± ¡°Well? What did he say?¡± ¡°His name is Liam, and according to him, Prince Simon sensed their killing intent before they could deal the finishing blow,¡± Rode told him. ¡°Simon was able to evade all their attacks, though his movements were a bit clumsy. That¡¯s when he decided to change sides and pretend to assist him instead.¡± ¡°That bastard... you said you saw him kill two of his companions himself?¡± Juno asked with a frown. ¡°That is right, your highness,¡± Rode agreed, ¡°he said he needed to avoid suspicion. He then proceeded to observe Prince Simon as he killed the rest of the knights that remained.¡± ¡°And what was his verdict?¡± ¡°He said that Prince Simon had deadly precision. Your highness saw how he killed the last knight yourself...¡± ¡°That¡¯s right,¡± Juno frowned some more. ¡°He tore through that man as if he was tearing through paper. Perhaps giving him that defective sword was a bad idea after all...¡± ¡°I was thinking the same thing, your highness,¡± his attendant agreed. ¡°I remember you ordered the royal blacksmith to make his bastard sword four times heavier than a regular long sword, it¡¯s much broader and thicker as well.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right. The only thing that makes it a bastard sword is that it¡¯s a bastardized long sword. The type of irregular long swords that no name blacksmiths mass produced during the War of Liberation.¡± ¡°Isn¡¯t that what he wanted?¡± Rode reminded him. ¡°The Golden Hero of legend was said to have fought with an unusually large bastard sword himself. A hand-and-a-half sword he picked up in some battlefield while making his way to the capital to fight the Demon Lord.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right, it was said that the Golden Hero could wield that sword single-handed, even though it was as tall as he was.¡± ¡°I remember Prince Simon was pretty small when he started practicing his sword as well,¡± Rode said with a little laugh. ¡°Hmph. It was those foolish tales that put that silly idea in his head. It was so easy to manipulate him and make him believe that going against the Behemoth would make him a hero,¡± Juno frowned. ¡°I never would have thought he could actually turn into one!¡± ¡°So, what are your plans now, your highness?¡± his attendant asked him. ¡°Now it¡¯s all out of my hands,¡± he replied. ¡°I can¡¯t possibly go against a person who had gone through a true awakening.¡± Rode went silent. ¡°Do you really think that his powers awakened, your highness?¡± he asked thoughtfully. ¡°What else could it possibly be?¡± Juno snapped at him. ¡°I wouldn¡¯t be surprised if a god had blessed him with such power. What happened this afternoon wasn¡¯t something that worm can achieve on his own, and you know it. That is why I have decided to let him be, and leave his fate to the academy instead.¡± Prince Jonas looked out the window and at his brother¡¯s carriage. ¡°An ignorant kid like him? The students will surely eat him alive.¡± ¡°Then, should we stop targeting Prince Simon from now on?¡± asked Rode. ¡°Hmm...¡±
CHOICES: [Yes, we should just let him be.] go to Part 42 [No, I¡¯ve got one more trick up my sleeve.] go to Part 43
Part 42 – Just Let Him Be Simon was still pondering in the darkness of his carriage when his thoughts were disrupted by a knock on his door. He turned to the right and called out, ¡°Who is it?¡± ¡°It is Rode, your highness,¡± answered his brother¡¯s attendant. Simon opened the door. The bright morning sunlight entered his dark dwelling, making his eyes squint involuntarily. ¡°Good morning, your highness, Prince Simon,¡± Rode greeted him. ¡°Your brother, Prince Juno, would like you to join him for breakfast.¡± Simon stared at Rode. The attendant''s words hardly registered in his mind. It took a while for him to nod his head and slowly get off his carriage. ¡°How is my brother?¡± he asked as they walked towards Prince Juno¡¯s carriage. ¡°He is doing fine, your majesty. And you?¡± ¡°I hardly had a wink of sleep.¡± Rode looked closer at the young prince. Dark circles surround his bloodshot eyes. It really did seem like he stayed up all night. ¡°I am sorry to hear that,¡± he said with a slight bow, ¡°I suggest you eat a hearty meal this morning to lessen your fatigue. We shall be leaving for the nearest town soon, then you can rest in an inn to recover your strength.¡± Simon gave a sigh. ¡°I would like that very much,¡± said he. ¡®Then perhaps these thoughts would finally leave my head alone.¡¯ ¡°Good morning brother Simon.¡± Simon almost jumped at the mention of his name. He looked forward and saw his brother seated behind a portable table. ¡°Good morning, brother Juno,¡± he replied. ¡°How was your night?¡± Prince Juno inquired. ¡°It was okay.¡± Juno stared at his brother¡¯s haggard looks and sighed. ¡°Why don¡¯t you sit down and join me for breakfast?¡± Simon looked at the food spread in front of them. He felt himself salivate at the sight of the feast, particularly at the steaming meat pie Rode was currently cutting. He just remembered that he hardly had any dinner due to the traumatic fight that happened. ¡°Seems to me, you weren¡¯t able to sleep well last night,¡± Juno said. ¡°There were just... a lot of things in my mind...¡± Simon replied. ¡°I know how you feel.¡± Simon looked at his brother once again. He does seem to look a bit nervous this morning. ¡°Never the less, we need to leave for the nearest town soon. Who knows what else is waiting to ambush us along the road. It would be best to eat your fill now so we can go on our way.¡± Simon stared at the food on his plate. Now that he was looking at it, his appetite seem to have left him. It was probably because of his brother¡¯s words. Would more assassins try to kill them again? Would he be lucky enough to beat them all? ¡°What¡¯s the matter, brother, aren¡¯t you hungry?¡± Simon snapped out of his thoughts. ¡°Do you not like the food, perhaps?¡± Juno asked. ¡°Ah... no, this is fine.¡± Simon took hold of his fork and knife and proceeded to cut a small portion of the pie. It was then that he noticed that his brother¡¯s plate was still clean. Unauthorized duplication: this narrative has been taken without consent. Report sightings. ¡°How about you, brother?¡± Simon noticed his brother Juno¡¯s shoulders tense up. ¡°Ah, I have a slight indigestion. I think perhaps, I should just eat some fruit instead.¡± Upon saying this, Juno took an apple from a basket of fruits in front of them and took a bite off it. Simon stared at him and slowly placed his fork down. ¡°Brother, I was actually planning to ask you something...¡± ¡°And what would that be?¡± Juno replied. ¡°The knights from yesterday,¡± continued Simon, ¡°I was wondering how they were able to accompany us without any of your knights realizing that they were impostors?¡± Simon watched his brother¡¯s jaw tighten. ¡°Didn¡¯t your knights Sir Eli and Sir Trix find it suspicious that they were different people?¡± He looked around and saw his brother¡¯s two knights standing guard, their eyes watching him. He turned to look the other way as if searching for someone. ¡°By the way, brother, did you see that bearded knight that was with me yesterday?¡± ¡°The bearded knight?¡± his brother answered rather nervously. ¡°He was nowhere to be found when morning came. We¡¯re suspecting that he was collaborating with the rest of the bandits you killed yesterday.¡± Simon stared at Juno wide-eyed. ¡°That can¡¯t be,¡± he said, frowning. ¡°That knight was the one who helped me kill those bandits. If it wasn¡¯t for him, I would have been killed as soon as I stepped outside of my carriage.¡± ¡°Is that so...¡± Juno looked pass him. Simon followed his gaze and noticed Rode standing behind him with a long, serrated bread knife in his hand. ¡°I¡¯m afraid the bearded knight is no longer here,¡± said the attendant. ¡°He probably ran away during the night.¡± ¡°Perhaps he got scared after seeing how... ¡®heroic¡¯ you truly are,¡± Juno said with a sarcastic grin. It was an expression that Simon had gotten used to seeing, but something inside him told him that this was something he should no longer condone. ¡°Brother, are you playing a trick on me?¡± Simon asked Juno in a flat tone. The grin on Juno¡¯s face faded. ¡°O-of course not, brother, why would I play tricks on you?¡± he quickly replied. ¡°I just can¡¯t help but think that you¡¯re making fun of me, like you and brother Largos always do.¡± Simon stared straight at Juno. ¡°I have always respected you as my elder brothers,¡± he continued, his gaze unwavering, ¡°but I can¡¯t help but wonder why you always try to make my life miserable. You never really picked on our other brothers as much as you picked on me.¡± ¡°Brother Simon, how can you say that?¡± Juno tried to smile but ended up with a crooked snarl instead. ¡°It just so happens that I was quite fond of you,¡± he reasoned. ¡°That¡¯s right, I just like to play harmless tricks on you because you were fun to tease...¡± ¡°Is that so?¡± Simon tilted his head to a side. ¡°Ah, it¡¯s because you never give up,¡± he explained. ¡°Seeing such a skinny boy practicing with an oversize sword every day was just so...¡± Juno paused and smiled at Simon. ¡°Inspiring.¡± Simon¡¯s brows raised up at his brothers words. ¡°I have always thought that you would simply throw your bastard sword away and stay locked up in your room crying after we make fun of you, but no... you learned to raise that sword and wield it around with those twig arms of yours, even if all you knew were two moves ¨C just a straight down slash and a stab. Yet you kept at it, even though not a single instructor wasted their time to teach you anything else.¡± Juno tried to read Simon¡¯s expressionless face as he went on. ¡°Wasn¡¯t it I who told father to send you to the Behemoth expedition to prove yourself to him?¡± he went on. ¡°I knew that you would be able to slow the monster down for us to kill it, but you went past our expectations and even slayed the behemoth yourself! You are our kingdom¡¯s Hero!¡± The smile on Juno¡¯s face looked desperate. ¡°I guess it is true what they say, that the gods favor the pure and the innocent!¡± he concluded. ¡°Is that so?¡± Simon asked, finally smiling at his older brother. ¡°I had no idea you had such high hopes in me.¡± ¡°Of course I do!¡± Juno declared. ¡°You are my brother, after all, we are of the same blood, though we have different mothers...¡± ¡°You see, I was thinking a lot last night,¡± Simon continued, disregarding his brother¡¯s words. ¡°I don¡¯t believe our cousin Prince Hayle would bother killing us. I doubt if you could actually take his place as future king in the West Twin. I also doubt that there were people from another country who plan to capture our kingdom,¡± he went on. ¡°If that was the case, they wouldn¡¯t have wasted their time attacking us. They would have targeted our country while we were away.¡± ¡°But wouldn¡¯t they ¨C¡± Simon raised his right hand as Juno tried to speak, raising his silver bread knife up in the air. ¡°I doubt if they were merely bandits in disguise as well,¡± he said. ¡°no bandit is stupid enough to attack a hero¡¯s entourage, and if they truly are idiots, they wouldn¡¯t have been intelligent enough to infiltrate our knights. Like I said, I don¡¯t believe that your knights never realized that they had been infiltrated in the first place.¡± Juno¡¯s face looked pale. ¡°And so, I concluded, that someone close to me must have orchestrated everything.¡± Simon¡¯s eyes stared at his brother¡¯s. ¡°Thus, I asked myself,¡± he added, pointing the bread knife at Juno, ¡°who would benefit the most if I were to die?¡± Juno suddenly stood up and moved away from the table. ¡°Are you pointing your blade at me?!¡± he shouted at Simon. ¡°What blade?¡± Simon feigned ignorance. ¡°I¡¯m merely enjoying my breakfast with you, brother.¡± he said with a smile, his thin lips stretched across his face. Juno kept his distance. ¡°Say brother,¡± Simon added after a while. ¡°This meat pie looks delicious, why don¡¯t you take a bite? Is there a reason why you won¡¯t eat it?¡± ¡°O-of course not!¡± Juno stuttered. ¡°Then why don¡¯t you sit back down and join me eat?¡± Juno stared at Simon who had never taken his eyes off of him. He looked at Rode next, then at his two knights who now stood next to their table. He took a deep breath and finally sat back on his seat. ¡°Rode, please serve me some of that pie.¡± ¡°Of course, your highness,¡± Rode replied with a slight bow. The attendant used the long serrated bread knife to serve him a slice. He placed it on the empty plate in front of him and stood by his side, facing Simon who sat still on his seat. Juno took his knife and fork, and cutting a chunk of pie, placed it in his mouth and started chewing. ¡°There,¡± he said after swallowing. ¡°now, can we finally have some breakfast?¡± Simon smiled at Juno. ¡°Of course, brother.¡± Only then did he take a bite off his food. Simon went back inside his carriage as soon as he finished his breakfast. Sir Eli was tasked to drive his carriage since the bearded knight was nowhere to be found. Soon, the entourage was on its way towards the nearest town.
Go to Part 51
Part 43 – One More Trick Up My Sleeve. The next day, Juno got up early and told Rode to prepare some breakfast. ¡°Something savory would be good, are there still some meat pies left?¡± ¡°Yes, your highness, should I prepare some breakfast for your brother as well?¡± ¡°Actually, I plan to give it all to my dear brother,¡± Juno replied. ¡°Before leaving the palace, Largos gave me something quite useful.¡± He took out a small vial from his inner pocket. It contained a yellowish liquid that seem to glitter in the early morning light. ¡°Is that the ¡®Corpse¡¯s Tear¡¯ poison?¡± Rode asked, his eyebrows raised. ¡°That¡¯s right. It is tasteless and odorless, it takes a couple of minutes for it to take effect, though.¡± ¡°I wonder where his highness Prince Largos bought such a poison, and why?¡± Rode said in a flat tone. ¡°That¡¯s not important. Just place this in the meat pie and prepare for breakfast.¡± --- Simon was still pondering in the darkness of his carriage when his thoughts were disrupted by a knock on his door. He slowly turned his face to the right and reached out to open it. The bright morning sunlight entered his dark dwelling, making his eyes squint involuntarily. ¡°Good morning, your highness, Prince Simon,¡± Rode greeted him. ¡°Your brother, Prince Juno, would like you to join him for breakfast.¡± Simon stared at Rode. The attendant''s words hardly registered in his mind. It took a while for him to nod his head and slowly get off his carriage. Unlawfully taken from Royal Road, this story should be reported if seen on Amazon. ¡°How is my brother?¡± he asked as they walked towards Prince Juno¡¯s carriage. ¡°He is doing fine, your majesty. And you?¡± ¡°I hardly had a wink of sleep.¡± Rode looked closer at the young prince. Dark circles surround his bloodshot eyes. It really did seem like he stayed up all night. ¡°I am sorry to hear that,¡± he said with a slight bow, ¡°I suggest you eat a hearty meal this morning to lessen your fatigue. We shall be leaving for the nearest town soon, then you can rest in an inn to recover your strength.¡± Simon gave a sigh. ¡°I would like that very much,¡± said he. ¡®Then perhaps these thoughts would finally leave my head alone.¡¯ he added to himself. --- ¡°Good morning brother Simon.¡± Simon almost jumped at the mention of his name. He looked forward and saw his brother seated behind a portable table. ¡°Good morning, brother Juno,¡± he replied. ¡°How was your night?¡± Prince Juno inquired. ¡°It was okay.¡± Juno stared at his brother¡¯s haggard looks and sighed. ¡°Why don¡¯t you sit down and join me for breakfast?¡± Simon looked at the food spread in front of them. He felt himself salivate at the sight of the feast, particularly the steaming meat pie Rode was currently slicing. He just remembered that he hardly had any dinner due to the traumatic fight that happened. ¡°Seems to me, you weren¡¯t able to sleep well last night,¡± Juno asked him. ¡°There were just... a lot of things in my mind...¡± ¡°I know how you feel.¡± Simon looked at his brother once again. He does seem to look a bit nervous this morning. ¡°Never the less, we need to leave for the nearest town soon. Who knows what else is waiting to ambush us along the road. It would be best to eat your fill now so we can go on our way.¡± Simon stared at the food on his plate. Now that he was looking at it, his appetite seem to have left him. It was probably because of his brother¡¯s words. Would more assassins try to kill them again? Would he be lucky enough to beat them all? ¡°What¡¯s the matter, brother, aren¡¯t you hungry?¡± Simon snapped out of his thoughts. ¡°Do you not like the food, perhaps?¡± Juno asked, a bead of sweat trickling slowly down his temple. ¡°Ah... no, this is fine.¡± Simon took hold of his knife and fork and proceeded to cut a small portion of the pie. It was then that he noticed that his brother¡¯s plate was still clean. ¡°How about you, brother?¡± Simon noticed Juno¡¯s shoulders tense up. ¡°Ah, I have a slight indigestion. I think perhaps, I should just take some fruit instead.¡± Upon saying this, Juno took an apple from a basket of fruits in front of them and took a bite off it. Simon took a slice of meat pie from his plate and lifted it to his mouth.
Go to Part 46
PART 44 - On a Tree Simon screamed. He heard a shrill voice accompany his and looked at Nell who was holding on to the carriage window for dear life. The two stared at each other, when their attention was drawn to one of the seat¡¯s top cushion popping off, uncovering a hooded body underneath. ¡°What the hell is that?!?¡± Nell screamed, before the carriage hit something with a ¡®FLUMP¡¯! ¡°Are we still alive?¡± Simon asked after checking if his limbs were still attached. ¡°I-I think so...¡± replied Nell who looked out of the window. ¡°I think we fuckin¡¯ fell on top of some hell of a big, ginormous tree!¡± Simon stared at Nell with his jaw hanging. ¡°The hell you gaping at?¡± asked Nell, his honey brown eyes glaring at him, for his hood and mask had both fallen off due to their accident. ¡°Y-your speech is a bit...¡± ¡°Shut the fuck up and help me get this body out of the carriage seat!¡± Simon looked at the body hidden beneath Nell¡¯s seat. The person was wearing a brown cloak which seemed to be stained with blood. It wasn¡¯t moving. ¡°I-is he still alive?¡± he asked the healer who was holding the hooded person¡¯s wrist to check their pulse. ¡°I don¡¯t think they¡¯ve croaked yet, but the pulse is weak.¡± Nell pulled the body out with Simon¡¯s help and removed the hood. Simon gave a gasp. ¡°L-Lady June?¡± He looked at the unconscious girl with her hair tied in a loose bun. ¡°She has a stab wound on her shoulder, and a bumb on her forehead,¡± said Nell after examining her. ¡°Probably got it earlier. There doesn''t seem to be any major organ or vein damage, but she has lost a lot of blood, and have sustained several scratches and bruises on her body.¡± ¡°C-can you heal her?¡± Simon asked with concern, which earned him a glare from the novice priest. ¡°What else do you think I¡¯m doin¡¯ right now, idoit?¡± he snapped. ¡°S-sorry.¡± ¡°What for?¡± ¡°F-for... being so useless...¡± The story has been illicitly taken; should you find it on Amazon, report the infringement. ¡°Well, at least you¡¯re aware.¡± Simon felt his face burn. He watched as Nell¡¯s hands glow golden with healing light. Lady June¡¯s pale face seem to instantly look better as some color returned to her bruised cheek. Even the pained look on her strained brows have gotten softer. ¡°I-I think it was much better when you were under a vow of silence...¡± he mumbled. ¡°The hell...¡± Nell cursed yet again, ¡°you sound just like that annoying old bastard back at the Stone Temple monastery!¡± he retorted. ¡°Well, now that I¡¯ve broken my vow, what¡¯s the fuckin¡¯ use of keepin¡¯ silent?¡± ¡°C-can you at least... not curse out too much?¡± ¡°Hell. No.¡± ¡°But as a novice priest...¡± ¡°What? You one of them tight-assed racist mother fuckin¡¯ bigots who think that all priests need to be prim and proper and hold their tongue through all their sufferin¡¯s `coz it¡¯s some sort of fuckin¡¯ sacrifice they must learn to live through?!¡± ¡°Huh? I-I didn¡¯t mean...¡± ¡°Or are you one of those mother fuckin¡¯ pervert bastards who think my face don¡¯t fit my personality?¡± ¡°M-most c-certainly not...!¡± Simon stuttered. He can¡¯t deny, though, that Nell looked like an angelic being, even with his sleek, platinum blond hair shaved close to his perfectly round scalp, and his honey blond eyes that seem to glow golden even inside the shadowy carriage they were currently occupying. ¡°Is Lady June going to be fine?¡± he asked instead, changing the subject. ¡°I have already stopped the bleeding and healed most of her minor wounds. We would just need to wait for her to wake up.¡± ¡®At least he talks properly when he¡¯s healing someone...¡¯ Simon found himself thinking. ¡°So...¡± Simon looked outside the carriage window, at the darkening sky above, and the thick green canopy beneath them. ¡°What do we do now?¡± ¡°Hell if I know.¡± Simon couldn¡¯t help but sigh. ¡°Anyway, it¡¯s a good thing that we fell on top of this huge tree, but I wonder what happened to the horses and that bearded knight who helped us escape...¡± ¡°Dead, obviously. Probably weren¡¯t lucky enough to land on a tree.¡± ¡°How could you just say that!¡± Simon asked, horrified with Nell¡¯s reply. ¡°I¡¯m a realist. Expecting for the best would just disappoint you.¡± ¡°You¡¯ve got a point, but...¡± ¡°Do you hear any horses neighing?¡± Nell asked Simon. ¡°N-no...¡± Simon frowned at his closed fists. ¡®Nell is probably right,¡¯ he thought. ¡®We would have heard the horses crying in pain if they were still alive, we fell from such a height, after all. The knight probably died while trying to help us escape, thus the horses fell off the cliff with us.¡¯ Simon shuddered. ¡®I can¡¯t help but pray that they died instantly.¡¯ Nell gave an exaggerated sigh and rubbed his hands together. ¡°Well, anyway, this Lady would be better after some rest,¡± said he. ¡°At least that¡¯s some good news.¡± Simon placed his attention on the unconscious lady instead. ¡°There is still some minor damage inside her, but it¡¯s nothing some rehab healing can¡¯t deal with,¡± the healer added. ¡°Thank goodness, then,¡± Simon heaved a sigh of relief. ¡°So, who¡¯s the woman anyway? What the hell was she doin¡¯ underneath my seat?¡± ¡°I¡¯m not sure myself...¡± Simon scratched his golden locks. ¡°I just met her yesterday, she¡¯s the daughter of Earl Summers, the head minister of finance in our kingdom.¡± ¡°Oh, is she one of them bride candidates you told me `bout?¡± Simon reddened. ¡°I guess she couldn¡¯t wait to be with you, huh?¡± he said with a sleazy grin. ¡°But, yesterday, she made it clear that she has no plans of getting married.¡± ¡°Is that why she decided to elope instead?¡± Nell gave a loud, annoying laugh. ¡°I doubt it, she seemed to be a very... proper girl...¡± ¡°Whatever the reason, you can ask her about it when she wakes up,¡± said Nell. ¡°You want me to wake her up?¡±
CHOICES: [Wake Lady June Up? ] go to Part 47 [Let her rest?] go to Part 48
PART 45 – June Simon sat on a tree root as the bearded knight cleaned his wrecked up carriage. He still feels a bit bewildered while holding a steaming cup of tea he got from his brother¡¯s attendant, Rode. ¡°It seems Lady June doesn¡¯t plan to leave her hiding spot,¡± he mumbled to himself as he sipped his tea absentmindedly. ¡°I wonder why she decided to stow away with us?¡± ¡°Your carriage is all clean now,¡± the bearded knight called out to him. Simon stood up and went close to him. ¡°Will... thank you for saving us...¡± he whispered to the knight. ¡°I don¡¯t know what you¡¯re talking about, Prince Simon,¡± Will said with a frown. ¡°All I did was tell you who to stick your sword into. You did the rest yourself.¡± Simon felt himself blush. He was elated to meet his savior again, but as usual, Will does not wish to be recognized for helping him. He watched him climb the coachman¡¯s seat where he would be spending the night standing guard over the carriage. ¡°Now hop inside and get some sleep,¡± Will told him. ¡°That little friend of yours has been asking for you for some time now.¡± Simon looked at his brother Juno¡¯s carriage where his two knights kept standing guard on horseback. His brother has probably gone to sleep already since it was getting pretty late. It took quite a while for Will to wash all the blood out from the carriage floor. Simon sighed and entered his damp carriage, pulling the curtains on the windows close as he did. ¡°Is that you, Prince Simon?¡± came a soft voice from within the seat in front of him. ¡°Yes, Lady June, it¡¯s me. You can come out from there if you wish.¡± ¡°Oh, thank goodness!¡± The seat cover lifted up as the hooded head of Lady June peeked at him. She took the cover off completely and stepped out of the boxed seat. Simon saw a nest of blankets inside before she replaced the cover and sat in front of him. ¡°Augh! I¡¯m aching all over from that cramped space!¡± ¡°W-why did you decide to hide in there in the first place, Lady June?¡± Simon asked as the young lady stretched herself. ¡°Just call me June,¡± she told him. ¡°In return, I¡¯ll call you Simon when there¡¯s just the two of us.¡± ¡°I-I don¡¯t think it would be appro-¡± ¡°Why not? And why are you so stiff?¡± June slapped him on the shoulder. Simon stared at her wide-eyed. ¡°Let¡¯s be friends since we¡¯ll be traveling together for quite a while.¡± Reading on this site? This novel is published elsewhere. Support the author by seeking out the original. ¡°I... I guess so...¡± Simon said awkwardly. He has had very little interaction with the opposite sex, and this lady was even one of his prospective fiances! June stared at Simon with a mysterious smile. She had a lot of plans in her head, and one of them was making use of the spineless, ignorant, and gullible 9th prince to get to the Capital. She¡¯s been having second thoughts, though, after seeing him fight with the knights earlier. ¡®I guess he¡¯s not that big of a push over after all.¡¯ she thought to herself. ¡®I still find it hard to believe that he could actually handle a sword. He could really kill me if I push him too far.¡¯ ¡°So...¡± Simon broke her chain of thought, ¡°why were you hiding in my carriage?¡± ¡°I decided to accompany you to the capital,¡± said June, thinking that saying the truth would be best. ¡°I have always wanted to learn in the Royal Maralict Imperial University, and frankly, traveling with you is the only way I can go there since my father refuses to send me.¡± ¡°Then... does this mean that your father has no idea that you¡¯re here?¡± ¡°Yes.¡± ¡°But, wouldn¡¯t he be looking for you?¡± ¡°Obviously.¡± ¡°Then you should go back at once! He must be worried sick about you!¡± ¡°Oh, you don¡¯t have to worry about that, I told him I would be leaving early for my boarding school. He won¡¯t know about my absence until the Convent of the Lilac Rose calls him in about a month from now to ask why I haven¡¯t arrived yet.¡± ¡°But still...¡± ¡°Don¡¯t worry about a thing,¡± June interrupted him. ¡°I have brought enough funds to last me a year in the capital, and I already have a place to stay with a friend I have correspondence with,¡± she assured him. ¡°All I need is a ride to get there.¡± ¡°Well... if that¡¯s the case...¡± ¡°So, where¡¯s our first stop?¡± she asked while taking out a blanket from beneath her seat. ¡°I couldn¡¯t hear much of what your brother said earlier since I was hiding.¡± ¡°Well, as you already know, we¡¯ll be staying here in the edge of the Twilight Forest for the night, since we couldn¡¯t make it to a town before nightfall. We¡¯ll go to the nearest town tomorrow morning and send a report to our father the King, then make our way to the nearest city with a warp portal to the Empire.¡± ¡°Right... it would take us three weeks to get to the nearest warp zone,¡± said June, making herself comfortable on the cushioned seat. ¡°That¡¯s what they said... wouldn¡¯t it be difficult for you to travel underneath the seat, then?¡± ¡°Just keep the carriage doors locked and the curtains closed and tell them it¡¯s cold.¡± ¡°Oh... okay...¡± ¡°Do you have anything to eat?¡± June¡¯s stomach gurgled. ¡°Ah... I forgot to get you some stew from dinner!¡± Simon gasped. ¡°I have some beef jerky here, if you like...¡± ¡°Thanks.¡± ¡°I can ask Will to get you something else to eat...¡± ¡°Will?¡± ¡°The bearded knight who helped us.¡± ¡°No thank you, this will be enough,¡± June replied with a yawn. ¡°We should turn in to sleep soon since we had quite a rough day.¡± ¡°Oh, okay...¡± Simon lay on his seat, pulled a blanket up to his chin, and closed his eyes. Lady June stared at him in the half darkness, the crescent moon outside, the only light. ¡®He looks so weak and small,¡¯ she thought to herself. ¡®I still can¡¯t believe he was capable of killing those treacherous knights on his own...¡¯ A deep frown formed on June¡¯s smooth forehead as she recalled the events earlier. How the bearded knight pushed Simon towards the incoming knights. How he parried their blows with a fearful grunt. How his face drained of color as he killed men much bigger than him one after the other. ¡®Well, now that I look properly,¡¯ she thought, ¡®I notice how sinewy his arms are. He¡¯s pure muscle with hardly any body fat, and he carried that steel sword as if it was merely made of canvas. I guess he really is the hero who defeated the Behemoth after all...¡¯ she pondered with a grin. ¡®He¡¯ll be pretty useful as a traveling companion and a bodyguard to boot.¡¯ She turned on her seat to find a more comfortable position and sighed. She can¡¯t seem to fall asleep due to all of the excitement. Frowning, she looked at Simon once more, pondering if she should talk to him some more, but then again, it would be best to let him get some rest.
CHOICES: [Ask if he¡¯s still awake.] go to Part 49 [Just go to sleep.] go to Part 50
Part 46 – A Slice of Meat Pie Simon took a bite of his Meat Pie. He could taste the savory fragrance of the meat and spices in the dish. It was so appetizing that he was soon taking one mouthful after another. ¡°Slow down, brother, there is more from where that came from,¡± Juno said with a grin as Rode sliced another portion for him. ¡°I guess I am hungrier than I though...¡± said Simon. ¡°This meat pie is really good, why don¡¯t you have some, brother?¡± ¡°Like I said, I¡¯m not that hungry.¡± Simon placed his knife down. ¡°Brother, I was actually planning to ask you something...¡± ¡°And what would that be?¡± ¡°The knights from yesterday,¡± continued Simon, ¡°I was wondering how they were able to accompany us without your other knights realizing that they were impostors?¡± Simon watched his brother¡¯s jaw tighten. ¡°Didn¡¯t your knights Sir Eli and Sir Trix find it suspicious that they were different people?¡± Juno held his tongue and remained silent. Simon turned to look around the area. He saw his brother¡¯s two knights standing guard by his carriage, but there was no trace of the bearded knight anywhere. ¡°By the way, brother, did you see that bearded knight that was with me yesterday?¡± ¡°The bearded knight?¡± his brother coldly asked back. ¡°He was nowhere to be found when morning came. We¡¯re suspecting that he was collaborating with the rest of the bandits you killed yesterday.¡± ¡°That can¡¯t be!¡± Simon said with a frown. ¡°That knight was the one who helped me kill those bandits! Why, if it wasn¡¯t for him, I would have been killed as soon as I stepped outside of my carriage!¡± ¡°Is that so...¡± Juno looked pass him. Simon followed his gaze and noticed Rode standing behind him. ¡°I¡¯m afraid the bearded knight is no longer here. He probably ran away during the night,¡± said the attendant. ¡°He probably got scared after seeing how... ¡®heroic¡¯ you truly are,¡± Juno told him with a sneer. It was an expression that Simon was very used to seeing, yet this time, the malice behind it was so undisguised that he instinctively knew that something was wrong. ¡°Brother, are you playing another trick on me?¡± he asked Juno in a flat voice. The grin on Juno¡¯s face suddenly disappeared. ¡°Of course not, why would I play tricks on my dear brother the hero?¡± he quickly replied. Simon cleared his throat. ¡°I just can¡¯t help but think that you¡¯re planning to make fun of me, like you and brother Largos used to do when ever you see me practicing my sword in the courtyard.¡± His brows knit together as he made an effort to confront his brother for the first time. ¡°I have always respected you as my elder brothers,¡± he continued, clearing his throat once more, ¡°but I can¡¯t help but wonder why you always like to pick on me, even though our other brothers were also there...¡± ¡°Ah,¡± Juno smiled at Simon. ¡°That is because you never give up,¡± he explained. ¡°Seeing you, a skinny boy practicing with an oversize sword every day, though you were just an insignificant prince who would never have a chance on the throne was just...¡± Juno paused and stared at Simon. ¡°Annoying.¡± Simon¡¯s eyes widened at his brothers words. His cold degrading eyes stared at him as if he was back on the dusty courtyard floor, writing in pain as his brothers kick him to the ground. ¡°W-what do you mean...¡± he coughed. ¡°I have always thought that an idiot like you would simply throw that stupid bastard sword away and stay out of my sight, like the rest of our useless brothers. But no. You learned to raise that sword and wield it around with those twig arms of yours. All you knew were two move. Just a straight down slash and a stab. Yet you kept at it, even though not a single instructor wasted their time to teach you anything useful.¡± Simon coughed some more, too lost for words to answer back. ¡°I told father to send you to the Behemoth expedition to get rid of you,¡± Juno went on. ¡°I was hoping that an eyesore like you would be able to slow that monster down, or at least fill its stomach enough to satisfy it and make it easier for me to slay it. But no. You had to be the ¡®Hero¡¯.¡± Juno stood up, staring down at Simon who kept coughing on his seat. ¡°I didn¡¯t want to believe it at first. It was just impossible for something like you to be better than me in anything!¡± he sneered. ¡°I guess it is true what they say, that the gods prefer ignorant idiots over proper nobles like myself.¡± Simon¡¯s cough started to rattle in his chest. Soon, he was spitting blood. ¡°So you see, brother,¡± Juno glared at him, ¡°this is the last resort I could think of to get rid of you.¡± ¡°But... you are my brother...¡± Simon gasped. ¡°I look up to you... I trusted you...¡± Juno simply glared at him. ¡°Eli, Trix.¡± ¡°Yes, your highness?¡± the two knights approached their table. ¡°Get rid of the trash.¡± ¡°As you wish, your highness.¡± ¡°No...¡± muttered Simon. The two knights approached him as he clawed at his rattling chest, his cough, getting worst by the minute, but he refused to stay still. No. He had had enough. All his life he had endured for he was just a lowly prince. He had always looked up to his eldest brother. He was his own flesh and blood, his idol, his hero. But now, all reason has gone as he saw the disgusted look on his hero¡¯s face. The two knights drew their swords. They rushed at Simon who held only a bread knife in his shaking hand. ¡°Time to die, hero,¡± said Trix with a snarl in his lips. ¡°No!¡± shouted Simon, blood sputtering out of his mouth. He raised the knife he held and parried the knight¡¯s sword to his right. The knight looked surprised. He had underestimated the young prince and didn¡¯t expect him to quickly raise the serrated blade to his neck. Sir Trix looked bewildered as warm blood splattered from a gush on his neck. ¡°Eli!¡± shouted Juno, pointing at Simon with a shaking finger. Simon faced the remaining knight and didn¡¯t bother waiting for an attack. He jumped at Eli first, before the other could even raise his long sword. The last thing Sir Eli saw was the point of Simon¡¯s knife, rushing at his eye. ¡°Your highness, run!¡± said Rode as he placed himself between the two brothers. Simon picked up Sir Eli¡¯s sword and stared murderously at Juno. ¡°Stay away from ¨C ¡° A simple whip of the wrist sent the attendant¡¯s head flying to the ground. ¡°Swords... are so light...¡± Simon said between bloody coughs. ¡°So easy... to use... so easy to kill...¡± And with his last, painful breath, Simon severed the head of his brother from its neck. Simon stared at the horrified look plastered on his brother¡¯s lifeless face. Juno¡¯s cold, degrading gaze was no longer there. He stared at it until his sight went darker, and sweet death took the pain in his chest away.
bad ending ??
This book was originally published on Royal Road. Check it out there for the real experience. Part 47 – Wake The Lady Up Simon noticed the young Lady, June Summers stirring. The light from Nell¡¯s hands faded away as he nudged the lady¡¯s shoulder to wake her up completely. ¡°Hey, you awake yet?¡± he asked his new patient. ¡°W-what happened..?¡± Lady June asked as she opened her deep blue eyes and stared at the two young men in front of her. ¡°Where are we?¡± ¡°Lady June, we¡¯re the ones who should be asking you questions,¡± was Simon¡¯s reply. ¡°I felt something stab me earlier...¡± Lady June touched her bare shoulder which was now free of any wound or scar. ¡°My friend Nell here is a healing priest in training, he has already healed your wound.¡± ¡°But getting stabbed was...¡± ¡°Yeah, well we were attacked by that bastard first prince¡¯s knights,¡± said Nell with a snort. ¡°First prince?¡± Lady June looked even more confused. ¡°That bastard Juno tried to kill the Hero of the kingdom!¡± Nell told her. ¡°I-is this the truth?¡± Lady June looked at Simon. ¡°I... I still could not believe it myself...¡± Simon nodded awkwardly. ¡°Then... it would be best for us to leave...¡± Lady June looked out the windows. It was already dark outside. ¡°Where are we exactly?¡± she asked. ¡°We are at the Eastern rim of the Twilight Forest,¡± said Simon. ¡°The what?!¡± Lady June suddenly sat up straight from where she lay on the carriage floor. The carriage shook slightly. ¡°How did we end up in the Twilight Forest?! This place is said to be crawling with monsters and demons!¡± ¡°One of the knights accompanying us helped us escape, but it seems the carriage had fallen off the cliff,¡± explained Simon. ¡°And the knight?¡± Lady June asked. ¡°I¡¯m afraid he might have fallen to his death...¡± Simon continued in a solemn tone. ¡°Ah, what a predicament!¡± Lady June stood up and looked out of the windows, straining her eyes against the twilight. The carriage shook some more. ¡°Lady June, can you please stay still?¡± Simon asked of her while holding tight to one of the carriage windows. ¡°Yeah, do you want us to plunge to our death?¡± Nell snapped at her. ¡°First, we need some light...¡± Lady June said, ignoring the two. ¡°Ah, I think I have a matchbox in my luggage...¡± Simon was about to check the luggage beneath his seat, when the inside of the carriage lit up. ¡°Whoa! That¡¯s a neat trick!¡± he heard Nell say, before looking back and seeing a small ball of flame floating at the tip of Lady June¡¯s index finger. ¡°Lady June! You can use magic?!¡± he asked in alarm. ¡°Yeah, just keep it between us,¡± replied the young lady. ¡°Why? What¡¯s wrong with magic?¡± Nell asked with a frown. ¡°It is strictly forbidden for women to learn magic in the Twin Kingdoms,¡± Simon informed him. ¡°It is also forbidden for men with no status to learn it. Even I and the rest of my brothers who are not in the direct succession, can only learn it when we come of age, and even then, only if we show any proficiency in it.¡± ¡°Wow. How stupidly petty,¡± Nell said flatly. ¡°What if a child was born with it?¡± ¡°Then they would be sent to the capital to enter the wizard¡¯s Magic Tower,¡± said Lady June. ¡°There are only a handful of magicians left in this world, after all. They would be taken from their families and raised there as magic acolytes and future wizards of the empire.¡± Royal Road is the home of this novel. Visit there to read the original and support the author. ¡°Just as a child with the gift of healing would be sent to the nearest temple to be trained as healing priests,¡± Simon added. ¡°Their family would then be rewarded appropriately.¡± ¡°Hmph!¡± Nell rolled his eyes. ¡°Then why is a magician like you not in that wizard temple you¡¯re talking about?¡± he asked Lady June. ¡°Well, my father didn¡¯t need to be ¡®rewarded appropriately¡¯ so he decided to keep me locked up at home instead,¡± she replied with a frown. ¡°So I guess now you¡¯ve decided to go to the Magic Tower on your own?¡± Nell asked with a snort. ¡°Of course not,¡± Lady June replied, ¡°I plan to go to the Royal Academy and learn magic there, instead of some stuck up tower ruled by an arrogant witch who calls herself the ¡®Grand Meister¡¯ of magic!¡± Simon¡¯s jaw dropped as he stared at the girl beside him. ¡°Lady June! How could you say such a thing about His Majesty, Emperor Jonas Maralict of the Holy Maralict Empire¡¯s only sister, Empirical Princess AnnMaralict, the Grand Meister of the Wizard¡¯s Magic Tower!¡± ¡°What¡¯s with all the stupid titles?¡± Nell pipped in. ¡°Exactly. They¡¯re nothing but a fake hero and a self proclaimed meister who just happened to know a bit of magic!¡± the girl said with a snort. ¡°Fake who?¡± Nell asked. ¡°L-Lady June!¡± Simon scolded her nervously. ¡°Be careful what you say, someone might hear you and indict you for l¨¨se-majest¨¦! Defaming his majesty the emperor is a treacherous crime that can get you and your entire family executed!¡± ¡°As if there¡¯s anyone here to hear us!¡± scoffed Lady June. ¡°And just call me June,¡± she added. ¡°We¡¯re not exactly in the best of places to keep being formal with each other, right, Simon?¡± ¡°O-oh...¡± Simon blushed. ¡°I-I guess you have a point there...¡± ¡°Now, why don¡¯t you tell me what happened while I was unconscious?¡± she asked the two boys. ¡°We seem to have fallen off a cliff,¡± Simon told her. ¡°We think, perhaps, the coachman was killed while we were trying to escape my brother¡¯s treachery, thus, the carriage went over the cliff and fell on a gigantic tree. It¡¯s a good thing, though, that the tree we fell on seems to be very sturdy.¡± June cautiously made her way to the window with her arm out to illuminate the area. There were trees all around them. It seems they fell through the canopy and landed on a shorter tree, for they cannot even tell the direction of the cliff where they fell off from. ¡°I guess it would be better to check the area once the sun is out.¡± ¡°Damn right!¡± Nell said. ¡°Now keep still before you cause the carriage to drop on the fuckin¡¯ forest floor.¡± June glared at Nell. ¡°Are you sure that¡¯s a novice priest?¡± she asked Simon, pointing at Nell with her thumb. ¡°You got a problem with me, bitch?¡± Nell glared at her. ¡°Now, now, Nell, can¡¯t you just keep your vow of silence again?¡± Simon said with a nervous laugh. ¡°Don¡¯t wanna. That senile old priest bastard was the one who forced it on me. I only kept at it since he dared to say that I can never keep my mouth shut! Why¡¯d I need to keep it if he¡¯s not here to catch me? Besides, I¡¯ve already broken it anyway!¡± ¡°Well, you¡¯ve been keeping it all this time, so why stop now?¡± ¡°You think I can just keep my silent with all this fuckin¡¯ bullshit happenin¡¯ all `round me?!¡± ¡°Hah, let¡¯s just drop it!¡± said June as she placed the flame from her finger afloat in the middle of the carriage. ¡°Let¡¯s just get some rest for now.¡± The three took the luggage from beneath the seats to get some food and blankets. Regrettably, most of the supplies were in the bags underneath Nell¡¯s seat, and the scheming Lady June had secretly disposed of most of them to plan her stow-away. ¡°God dammit! You even got rid of my bag my clothes?!¡± Nell snapped at her. ¡°I haven¡¯t even tried them on!¡± ¡°We can just share the ones I brought with me,¡± Simon volunteered before the two could bicker again. ¡°So,¡± Nell finally settled down on a thick blanket on the carriage floor. ¡°Who¡¯s that fake hero you mentioned earlier?¡± he asked June. ¡°T-that was just a rumor...¡± Simon tried to dismiss it with a laugh. ¡°It isn¡¯t a rumor!¡± June interrupted him. ¡°My father has solid proof from written journals about what truly happened at the end of the War of Liberation twenty years ago!¡± ¡°He does?¡± Simon asked, his curiosity getting the better of him. ¡°Of course!¡± June said haughtily. ¡°Our family¡¯s library boasts of exceptionally rare and unusual books, even ones forbidden by the emperor himself!¡± ¡°Then you know what happened after the real Hero left?¡± Simon asked. ¡°I thought you just said it was only a rumor?¡± June gave him a challenging glare. ¡°Just tell me about this fake hero you mentioned!¡± Nell insisted. ¡°What? Are you some kid, asking for a fairy tale story before bedtime?¡± June mocked him. Well, Nell does look like he¡¯s younger than the both of them. ¡°How old are you anyway?¡± she asked the novice priest. ¡°Eighteen.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t believe you. You look like you¡¯re just 12!¡± ¡°I said I¡¯m eighteen!¡± Nell pressed on, looking so pissed, that Simon couldn¡¯t help but think that June might have guessed his right age. ¡°Let me tell you the story then,¡± June said with a smirk, ¡°about his Majesty, Emperor Jonas Maralict, the ¡®Golden Hero¡¯, being a fake.¡± ¡°A fake?¡± Nell frowned. ¡°Why would the emperor be a fake?¡± ¡°That¡¯s why they called it a rumor...¡± Simon whispered beside him. ¡°You see, there are a lot of evidence showing that the ¡®Golden Hero¡¯ was someone else entirely,¡± said June. ¡°It shows that the emperor simply stole all his glory after the war ended, and even went to great lengths to cover it up and erase the existence of the real ¡®Golden Hero¡¯.¡± ¡°But the Golden hero really does exists!¡± Nell argued. ¡°He¡¯s in the capital right now as the emperor!¡± ¡°That¡¯s just it,¡± Simon told him patiently, ¡°The person sitting in the capital as our Emperor, is a different person,¡± he explained. ¡°He was a prince, a holy knight who took the title of emperor, but the real Golden Hero that fought the most during the war and actually killed the Demon King, was a different warrior of unknown origin.¡± ¡°Ho-ho! I see you know parts of the truth as well!¡± June told Simon as she rubbed her chin. ¡°But there is still more behind that truth.¡± ¡°Tell me the story!¡± Nell insisted. ¡°Aren¡¯t you two tired already?¡± Simon asked with a yawn. ¡°Yeah, it¡¯s time for kids to go to bed,¡± June gave Nell an annoying grin. ¡°I¡¯ll tell you the story some other time.¡± ============ CHOICES: [I wanna know more!] go to Part 54 [We should call it a day.] go to Part 57 ============ Part 48 – A Disorienting Morning June woke up feeling sore. Her back and neck were sore, as well as her arms and legs, for she was lying curled on her side, in a narrow bed with a thin cushion that made her whole body feel... yes, very sore. Her right arm, particularly so. She groaned and tried to stretch her legs, ending up kicking a wooden wall. Suddenly, the whole room was shaking. ¡°Stupid woman! Why can¡¯t you just stay still!?¡± came an angry voice from the floor, followed by several expletives. ¡°Wha¨C?!¡± June was so surprised that she sat bold upright. The room began to sway even more. ¡°What did I just tell you?!¡± yelled the angry voice once more. ¡°Nell, please don¡¯t yell at her, you¡¯re just scaring her.¡± ¡°Who... wha... where am I?!¡± June blurted out. ¡°It¡¯s just us, Prince Simon and my friend Nell the novice priest,¡± Simon told her. ¡°We found you hiding underneath the carriage seat yesterday. You were unconscious and bleeding, and we¡¯re currently in a carriage in the Eastern part of the Twilight forest.¡± ¡°Twilight forest?¡± she asked, still feeling disoriented. ¡°You mean... it wasn¡¯t all just a dream?!¡± After some introductions and Nell healing Lady June¡¯s right arm once more, the three decided to have some breakfast before making plans for that day. ¡°So, Prince Simon, you¡¯re saying that you were betrayed by your treacherous brother, Juno, the first crown prince?¡± Lady June asked Simon who nodded solemnly. ¡°And we were helped by one of the nights who probably died doing so, and now, we have fallen into the Twilight forest?¡± ¡°And the Twilight forest being a natural basin surrounded by steep cliffs, it would be hard to get out, unless we can reach one of the official gates guarded by soldiers from the empire,¡± said Simon. ¡°If we can find one,¡± June added. ¡°The whole of Twilight forest is actually the massivecrater of an ancient volcano,and Twilight mountain in the middle is where the peak of the dormant volcano is located,¡±she continued. ¡°They say the size of the forest can fit the whole capital inside it, six times over.¡± ¡°Is that so?¡± Simon looked surprised. ¡°I had no idea it was that vast!¡± ¡°We would have to look for the forest¡¯s edge and follow the cliff walls until we come to an official gate and climb back up to return to the Royal Highway,¡± June said thoughtfully. ¡°Sounds good to me,¡± said Nell, chewing on a piece of beef jerky. ¡°So, can you tell us why you were hiding underneath the seat, Lady June?¡± Simon asked her. ¡°I have always wanted to go to the Royal Academy,¡± Lady June confessed, her cheeks reddening as she averting her eyes. ¡°My father is adamant about me leaving our home, so I came up with this plan when you told me that you were leaving for the capital,¡± she explained. ¡°This is the only way I can go there.¡± ¡°So, you run away from home and stuffed yourself inside our carriage, getting rid of my half of the luggage, just so that you can fit your big ass inside?¡± Nell asked her with irritation. ¡°Look, I¡¯m sorry I got rid of your luggage, okay?¡± June frowned at him. ¡°I promise to make it up to you, I have enough money with me, I¡¯ll just buy you new clothes when we get to the nearest town!¡± ¡°Well good fuckn¡¯ luck, gettin¡¯ there, then!¡± Nell snapped at her. June stared at him with a pout, then faced Simon. ¡°Are you sure that¡¯s a healing priest in training?¡± she asked, pointing ar Nell with her thumb. ¡°Yes, well, he did heal your wounds, didn¡¯t he?¡± Simon replied with a nervous laugh. ¡°That¡¯s right, you may be a bratty kid with a foul mouth, but you¡¯re a decent healer,¡± she frowned at Nell. ¡®I guess I can¡¯t blame him,¡¯ she told herself. ¡®I did get rid of his luggage.¡¯ She watched as Simon tried to pacify the novice priest. He looked about 12 years old or so, with very fair skin and close cropped platinum blond hair. His honey brown eyes burned with anger and his face looked sour, but he still looked beautiful in his white robe, even though it was quite stained. If you stumble upon this tale on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it. ¡°So, what are our plans now?¡± she asked her companions. ¡°I noticed that the horses¡¯ reins are still connected to the carriage,¡± said Simon. ¡°We could use it to lower ourselves to the ground.¡± ¡°Good, then why don¡¯t we¨C¡± June stood up, causing the carriage to shake once again. Nell was suddenly throwing curses at her again. ¡°The fuck! How many times do I need to tell you to keep still?! Why don¡¯t you just sit your big ass down before we all fall to our deaths?!¡± he yelled. ¡°Well excuse me for trying to help!¡± June snapped back. ¡°Why don¡¯t you two just stay still while I check out the reins?¡± Simon went between them. ¡°Yeah, you better do it, before this clumsy woman kills us all!¡± Nell retorted. ¡®Hold it in, June, hold it in!¡¯ June told herself while massaging her temples. ¡®Just be glad that you¡¯re alive and far away from your tyrant of a father.¡¯ ¡°Oh, good, we¡¯re not that far from the ground, after all,¡± she heard Simon call from the driver¡¯s seat. ¡°It seems that the carriage is wedged snugly between two thick branches, I¡¯m sure it won¡¯t fall off that easily.¡± ¡°See?!¡± she told Nell. ¡°Hmph.¡± The pouting kid simply left the carriage and held on the sides to follow Simon on the driver seat. ¡°You should go down with Nell, too, Lady June,¡± Simon told her as he entered the carriage once more. ¡°What about you?¡± ¡°I¡¯ll take our bags first before leaving.¡± June made her way out the carriage. She found it quite hard to hold on to the reins hanging from the driver¡¯s seat, particularly since the carriage wobbled a bit while she was descending it, but like Simon said, it was wedged quite securely and was supported by several leafy branches on both sides. In fact, you could hardly see the carriage from the bottom since the foliage as so thick, only the hanging leather reins gave away its position. ¡°Need help?¡± Nell asked, picking his nose as he watched her dangling in mid air. ¡°I-I can manage,¡± June said stubbornly before letting go and dropping butt first on the ground. Good thing she used a cushioning buff on herself. In fact, she could have easily lowered herself on the ground, but she chose not to do so. She has no intention of showing these two men what she was capable of. You see, June grew up under her overprotective father¡¯s supervision. She lost her mother when she was only three and could hardly remember her, but she have known all her life how men treat women, especially in their backwater kingdom that was so caught up in its old ways, that going against tradition is considered a sin punishable by death. ¡°Have you gone down, Lady June?¡± Simon called out to her from above. ¡°Yes, your Highness,¡± June replied. ¡°Can you please clear out from beneath the carriage so I can drop some of our stuff down?¡± June stepped aside and stood beside the tree¡¯s huge trunk, while Nell decided to look around the place. Simon then proceeded to drop their bags down, followed by folded blankets, and even the seat¡¯s cushions. ¡°Is that all of it?¡± asked June when nothing more seemed to be dropping from above. ¡°Wait... do you mind moving the bags to one side?¡± June did just that and was surprised when a large sword dropped down flat on the ground. ¡°My goodness! What is that?!¡± June exclaimed. ¡°Is that your sword?¡± ¡°Yes, it¡¯s my bastard sword, the royal blacksmith personally made it for me!¡± Simon said proudly as he landed on the ground next to his sword. ¡°That¡¯s a bastard sword?¡± June¡¯s brows furrowed. ¡°A bastard sword is meant to be held in one hand with the aid of the other, that¡¯s why it¡¯s called a hand and a half sword!¡± she said in a lecturing voice. ¡°It should measure about 45 inches, but that sword is aboutfive feet long and ¨C ¡± June suddenly stopped herself from talking. ¡°Ehem... anyway... it looks more like a two-handedclaymore!¡± ¡°Well, I wanted to have a bastard sword like the Golden Hero of legend, so...¡± ¡°But isn¡¯t it too big for you?¡± June stared at Simon¡¯s thin arms. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I¡¯m used to it.¡± Upon saying that, Simon picked up the sword in one hand and made a straight downward slash. ¡°I¡¯ve trained real hard to wield this sword,¡± he said shyly, ¡°as you can see, I can pick it up properly, now!¡± Lady June felt her face redden. Of course, Prince Simon would be able to wield his sword! Who was she to question the kingdom¡¯s hero? She quickly bowed her head to apologized. ¡°I-I beg your pardon, Prince Simon,¡± she said, ¡°I have crossed the line by doubting your highness¡¯ capabilities...¡± ¡°Oh, you don¡¯t need to worry, I don¡¯t really mind, and please, just call me Simon, we¡¯re no longer in the Castle, after all...¡± ¡°Then, please simply address me as June,¡± she replied with her head still bowed. ¡°Okay then, June, please raise your head.¡± ¡°Yes, Simon...¡± ¡°Are you two finished flirting?¡± Nell¡¯s voice called from behind them. June felt her face burn. She quickly faced the boy with an irritating look on her face. ¡°We¡¯re not flirting! I was simply¨C¡± ¡°Oh, wow, is that your bastard sword?!¡± Nell suddenly cut her off. ¡°Can I see it?!¡± ¡°O-of course!¡± said Simon whose face have also turned red. ¡°Wow! How come you never showed me your sword before?¡± Nell asked him while fussing around the sword. ¡°I couldn¡¯t use it while I was injured,¡± said he. ¡°Also, the royal blacksmith had to fix it after my battle with the behemoth. It got quite chipped and cracked back then.¡± ¡°Woah! It¡¯s just like the Golden Hero¡¯s sword!¡± exclaimed Nell who touched its hilt and tried to lift it with both hands. It hardly moved an inch. ¡°Anyway, I think it¡¯s time we take a look around the area,¡± said Simon as he lifted the bastard sword and placed it in a guard on his back. ¡°Are you taking the sword with you?¡± June asked him. ¡°We might encounter some wild animals along our way...¡± ¡°Also monsters and demons!¡± added Nell, ¡°They say the old Demon king¡¯s men were forced to jump the cliffs of the south-western edge of the Twilight Forest 20 years ago. They¡¯ve been in hiding here since then.¡± ¡°But... it looks so heavy!¡± June looked at Simon¡¯s slim body once more. She just couldn¡¯t help but worry about the puny prince. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I¡¯m used to carrying my sword,¡± replied Simon with a smile. ¡°What about the bags? There¡¯s three in total, since someone threw mine away,¡± Nell said, glaring at June. ¡°I can carry my bag, can you carry the other one with supplies inside, Nell?¡± Simon looked at June. ¡°I can carry your bag too if...¡± ¡°I can carry my own stuff, thank you!¡± June quickly said, raising her bag from the ground. She has no plans of becoming a burden, just because she was a girl. June¡¯s bag was quite heavy due to a couple of thick books hidden underneath her clothes. She looked sideways at her two companions and secretly whispered a quick spell to lighten her load. ¡®There much better,¡¯ she said to herself. She looked at Simon again, thinking of helping him with his sword, but she mustn¡¯t blow her cover. No one must know about her abilities before she reaches the Royal Academy.
Go to Part 59
Part 49 – Still Awake ?¡°Simon, are you asleep?¡± June asked her companion. It took a while, but Simon¡¯s eyes flickered open and his head turned to face her. ¡°N-not really,¡± he replied. ¡°Is there a problem?¡± ¡°No... I just can¡¯t go to sleep...¡± she sighed. ¡°We¡¯re at the edge of the Twilight forest, after all.¡± ¡°Oh, are you worried about the forest¡¯s inhabitants?¡± asked Simon, propping himself up with his elbow. ¡°I did hear about the monsters and demons living in the forest, and that the remnants of the Demon king¡¯s monstrous army were all banished there.¡± ¡°Right, they say some of the demons living deep inside the Twilight forest were on par with the Demon king himself,¡± said June. ¡°That¡¯s why the Emperor tasked the empire¡¯s magicians to place a magical barrier around the vast forest to keep its inhabitants imprisoned inside it.¡± ¡°Well, since the whole area is a sunken depression, it would take a lot of effort for the monsters to scale the cliffs that surround it,¡± said Simon. ¡°It¡¯s naturally built like a basin after all.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right, I read that the whole area was actually the massivecrater of an ancient volcano,and that the Twilight mountain in the middle is where the peak of that dormant volcano is located,¡±June said excitedly. ¡°They say the size of the forest can fit the whole capital inside it, six times over!¡± ¡°Wow, is it really that big?¡± Simon asked wide eyed. June gave him a knowing nod. ¡°That¡¯s the reason why it takes so long to get to the capital. We would need to travel for five whole months around the Twilight Forest to get there without a warp portal,¡± she continued. ¡°After all, the capital is at the other end of the forest from us.¡± ¡°The travel time would have been much shorter if we went aroundclockwise along the southern edgeof the Twilight forest, but the Devil¡¯s Horns mountain ranges are in the way,¡± Simon sighed. ¡°No one has ever gone through that perilous place before, since the mountains there reach up to the heavens, and the Dark Woods of Elenore are located at its feet.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right, isn¡¯t that where the Behemoth was said to have come from?¡± ¡°Actually, no one really knows where that monster originate from, it is considered uncharted territory after all,¡± said Simon. ¡°Though, witnesses reported that the Behemoth came out from the active volcano, mount Mal-veda, which is one of the peaks in the Devil¡¯s Horns mountain ranges.¡± ¡°By the way, they say the Dark Woods was an enchanted forest? Did you feel magic inside it? I wish I could visit it, too! they say that the other side of the Devil¡¯s Horns mountain ranges used to be forested as well, but it was turned into a desert during the Demon King¡¯s reign.¡± ¡°It was?¡± ¡°There¡¯s an old atlas back home showing various maps before the time of the Demon king,¡± June told Simon, beaming. ¡°It showed that the area on the other side of the mountain rages was once a lush forest, and near it was a country rules by elves and beastmen.¡± ¡°A country where elves and beastmen lived together?¡± Simon looked even more interested. The narrative has been illicitly obtained; should you discover it on Amazon, report the violation. ¡°That¡¯s right, it was the time before humans ruled the land,¡± June explained like a teacher to her pupil. ¡°It was before the Demon king¡¯s 500 year reign, when the five races still kept the pact that elves, beastmen, dwarfs, demons and humans must live in mutual respect of each other.¡± ¡°Hmm... very interesting... our tutors never mentioned such things to us in the past,¡± Simon said thoughtfully. ¡°That¡¯s because the last Demon King ordered all the history books to be burned when he started his tyrannical rule about a hundred years ago,¡± June pointed out. ¡°It is said that he used to be a good leader at the beginning of his 500 years rule, but he got too drunk with power and eventually ended up oppressing the rest of the races. It was only 20 years ago when his reign of tyranny was finally ended by the Golden Hero and his companions.¡± Simon perked up, ¡°Oh, I¡¯m quite fond of that story! I¡¯m a big fan of the Golden Hero after all!¡± Simon unconsciously looked at the window behind June, where Will was still sitting while he stood watch for the night. ¡°Then did you know that the current emperor on the throne is an impostor?¡± June said in a whisper. Simon¡¯s eyes widen at her bold words. ¡°The current emperor claims that he¡¯s the Golden Hero of legend, but he¡¯s just a prince who was knighted as a crusader and took all the glory from the real Hero!¡± ¡°J-June, I don¡¯t think you should be saying such things!¡± Simon said, hushing her up. ¡°If someone hears you talking l¨¨se-majest¨¦ or insulting the emperor...¡± ¡°Why? There¡¯s no one here to hear us, and it¡¯s the truth, after all,¡± she added haughtily. ¡°Even so¡­ I heard you can go to prison for spreading such things¡­ you can even be executed for treason together with your whole family!¡± ¡°Hmph. Are you going to tell on me, then?¡± she asked Simon who quickly shook his head. ¡°Anyway, you don¡¯t look too surprised to hear about these so-called ¡®insults¡¯?¡± ¡°Well, you see, my nanny used to tell me stories about the real Golden Hero when I was much younger, back when my mother was still alive¡­¡± ¡°Oh, my goodness, does she have first hand experience from actual events?!¡± ¡°First hand¡­?¡± Simon looked at a wide-eyed June. ¡°Well¡­ yes, she said she was a lady-in-waiting of one of the Demon King¡¯s concubines, and saw how the Golden Hero defeated the Demon King...¡± ¡°Oh, my god! Oh, my god! Oh, my god! Where is she now? You think I could interview her?¡± ¡°I¡¯m afraid she had passed away eight years ago, but I do remember her stories,¡± Simon said shyly. ¡°She said that the Golden Hero was able to defeat the Demon King with the help of Prince Jonas who later became emperor, and his sister, Princess Ann, who became the Grand Meister.¡± He noticed June¡¯s expression darken at the mention of the princess¡¯ name. ¡°She said that the Golden Hero was a holy knight who wielded a bastard sword and was blessed with such strong holy power that he glowed golden as the rays of sun god Arah''s light.¡± ¡°No, he wasn¡¯t a holy knight, he was a battle mage,¡± June corrected him. ¡°She probably confused him with Prince Jonas. They were always together after all.¡± ¡°Oh¡­ but what makes you so sure?¡± Simon asked with a frown. ¡°Because, a holy knight or crusader uses holy power bestowed to them by the sun god Arah, and the Golden Hero was a farmer¡¯s son who used magic from mana. Everybody knows that ¡®holy power¡¯ from gods can¡¯t mix with ¡®mana¡¯ from nature, just as a warrior¡¯s spiritual energy or ¡®chakra¡¯ can¡¯t mix with both!¡± ¡°Oh¡­¡± Simon felt his face burn. He never knew any of that. ¡°I guess our tutors haven¡¯t taught us about that yet¡­¡± ¡°Really?¡± June raised an eyebrow at him. ¡°Just what were they teaching you in the royal palace, then? Well, anyway¨C¡± June was about to lecture him some more, when her words were interrupted by a knock on the carriage¡¯s wall. ¡°Hey, aren¡¯t you kids going to sleep yet?¡± came Will¡¯s rough voice. Simon could hear his irritation in it. ¡°Who are you calling a kid?¡± June complained. ¡°Sorry!¡± Simon quickly pipped in. ¡°I think we better get some rest, too,¡± he told his companion while stifling a yawn. ¡°We¡¯ve still got a long way to go before reaching the capital, there¡¯s more time to talk about these stuff next time.¡± ¡°You¡¯ve got a point there,¡± June yawned as well. ¡°Then I guess it¡¯s time to call it a night.¡± The carriage finally went silent as the two youths went to sleep. Outside, sitting on the driver¡¯s seat, Will kept his eyes to the starry sky as he watched gray clouds hide the crescent moon.
Go to Part 50
Part 51 – He Knows ¡°The bastard!¡± Juno cursed inside his carriage. ¡°He knows, Rode. He¡¯s not as stupid as he looks!¡± ¡°It seems like it, your highness,¡± replied his attendant. ¡°It is a good thing that you decided not to target him anymore.¡± ¡°And here, I was planning to poison his breakfast!¡± Juno mumble, wiping the sweat off his pale face. He took a small vial from his pocket and threw it at his attendant who quickly caught it in mid air. It contained a yellowish liquid that seem to glitter in the early morning light. ¡°Is this the ¡®Corpse¡¯s Tear¡¯ poison?¡± Rode asked, his eyebrows raised. ¡°That¡¯s right. It is tasteless and odorless, it takes a few minutes for it to take effect, though. Largos gave it to me before we left the palace.¡± ¡°I wonder where his highness Prince Largos bought such a poison, and why?¡± Rode said in a flat tone. ¡°That¡¯s not important. Just get rid of it before that worm bastard finds it.¡± ¡°Of course, your highness,¡± Rode replied with a slight bow. ¡°About the bearded knight,¡± Juno continued, ¡°did you let him go, or did you get rid of him?¡± ¡°We actually have no idea where he currently is, your highness, he just disappeared during the night. Sir Eli and Sir Trix didn¡¯t even notice when he left. They have no idea where he went to, or who he really is.¡± ¡°Probably decided to run for his life after seeing Simon¡¯s skills,¡± Juno frowned. ¡°I guess this further proves that Simon really gained superhuman powers and defeated the behemoth himself.¡± ¡°There is no more doubt, it seems,¡± Rode said with a nod. ¡°The knight probably thought Prince Simon might kill him, too, once his cover is blown.¡± ¡°Hmph. Useless peasants! After all the aid and equipment I spent just to train them!¡± Juno muttered, trying to keep his voice from rising. ¡°Someone needs to pay for this! I knew training cut throats and mercenaries was a bad idea! I should have chosen proper knights from the lower nobility instead!¡± Love this novel? Read it on Royal Road to ensure the author gets credit. ¡°I sincerely apologize, your highness,¡± Rode bowed his head low, ¡°but they were the only ones I could recruit without garnering suspicion from your father and his retainers.¡± ¡°I know!¡± Juno snapped at him. ¡°And now, we have lost six of our best men... It¡¯s still hard to believe, but I have no choice but to accept it.¡± ¡°What shall we do now, your highness?¡± asked Rode, his head still bowed. ¡°We need to treat him with caution from now on. It is obvious that he no longer trusts me. Any little mistake might cost me my life!¡± ¡°Understood. I shall watch over him for the mean time,¡± the attendant suggested. ¡°Right. Do what he wants and give him what he asks for. Let him enjoy the rest of the journey.¡± A small smile returned on Juno¡¯s lips. ¡°Let¡¯s just leave him be and let the nobles in the capital judge him. I want to see how he would fare in the company of the real monsters.¡± ... The two prince¡¯s retinue arrived at the nearest town three hours later. They didn¡¯t bother to stop by small villages to save time, and went straight to the nearest inn upon their arrival. ¡°Is that all the luggage you have?¡± Juno asked his brother when he noticed that he was only carrying a traveling bag and a big sword he took from the carriage¡¯s top baggage area. ¡°These are my personal belongings,¡± replied Simon. ¡°I don¡¯t own much since I am just the 9th prince. We are not allowed to own much luxury.¡± ¡°Is that so?¡± Juno asked, feeling a bit nervous with the way Simon was staring at him. ¡°I guess we¡¯ll need to buy you more clothes when we get to the capital... On the meantime, why don¡¯t you head upstairs to your room for some rest?¡± ¡°I am on my way to my room right now,¡± replied Simon, ¡°but I would like to look around town for a bit later.¡± ¡°By yourself?¡± Juno raised an eyebrow at him. ¡°Would you mind lending me one of your knights as company, then?¡± Simon kept his stare at his brother Juno. ¡°B-but of course, not!¡± Juno replied with a fake laugh. He then threw a small bag of coins at Simon¡¯s direction. ¡°Here¡¯s some money. Go buy yourself anything you desire.¡± ¡°Thank you, brother Juno,¡± Simon gave him a curt bow before heading to his room upstairs. ¡°Ugh... he gives me the creeps!¡± Juno snapped at Rode who stood by his side. ¡°He looks like a completely different person... as if the ambush had drained all life from him.¡± ¡°It is probably due to shock, your highness,¡± said Rode. ¡°He was almost killed twice after all. Once by the behemoth, and last night by unknown men.¡± ¡°I almost miss the way he kept on pestering me to join him in the courtyard to practice swordsmanship each day!¡± ¡°He would probably go back to normal if you keep being nice to him,¡± Rode suggested. ¡°We must gain his trust once more. Show him that we mean no harm. Don¡¯t give him reason to be suspicious.¡± ¡°Right... I no longer have any plans to do so, lest I find myself at the other end of that bastard¡¯s sword.¡±
Go to Part 52
Part 50 – Morning Breaks ¡°Good morning brother Simon.¡± Simon almost jumped at the mention of his name. He looked drowsily in front of him and saw his brother Juno seated behind a portable table full of food. ¡®So that¡¯s where all the food was,¡¯ he thought to himself. ¡°Good morning, brother Juno,¡± he said with a smile. ¡°How was your night?¡± Juno asked. ¡°It was okay.¡± Juno stared at his brother. ¡°Why don¡¯t you sit down and join me for breakfast?¡± Simon looked at the food spread in front of his brother once more. He felt himself salivate at the sight of the feast, particularly at the steaming meat pie Rode was currently cutting. But he can¡¯t eat here right now. He needs to take some food to June who hardly had anything to eat last night. ¡°Well? Why don¡¯t you take a seat and join me for breakfast?¡± Juno asked him again. ¡°Did you not get enough rest last night?¡± ¡°There were just... a lot of things in my mind...¡± Simon replied, his eyes still on the food. ¡°I was planning to eat in my carriage. Do you mind if I take some food with me instead?¡± Juno fell silent. He looked at his attendant Rode who looked back at him. ¡°If that is how you feel,¡± he replied. ¡°Why don¡¯t you take this meat pie with you?¡± Juno pushed the dish towards Simon. ¡°Ah, no thank you,¡± the other replied. ¡°I know how much you like your meat pies.¡± Simon took some bread and a whole basket of fruits instead. ¡°Well, then,¡± he said with smile, ¡°please enjoy your pie.¡± The narrative has been illicitly obtained; should you discover it on Amazon, report the violation. ... Prince Juno and Rode watched as Simon took the food to his carriage. He handed some of it to the bearded knight still sitting outside on the driver¡¯s seat, then went inside and closed the door. Even the curtains around the carriage were all closed. Juno released the breath he was holding. ¡°He knows!¡± he sneered. ¡°The bastard knows!¡± he then pushed the whole pie tin off the table. ¡°H-how could he possibly know that we put some ¡®Corpse¡¯s Tears¡¯ poison in the pie?¡± Rode said trying to appease him. ¡°Then why did he refuse the pie?¡± June sneered. ¡°He even told me to ¡®enjoy your pie¡¯!¡± ¡°But he doesn¡¯t seem to be hostile against you,¡± Rode pointed out. ¡°He¡¯s just trying to be polite as always, you know how much he tries to suck up to you all the time.¡± ¡°But what if he¡¯s just acting as if he knows nothing of our plans?¡± Juno insisted. ¡°I mean, how stupid is he that he still thinks that I¡¯m looking out for him!? I¡¯ve been trying to get rid of him for years!¡± Juno sat on his chair, seething with rage as he stared at Simon¡¯s carriage. ¡°He¡¯s always been an eyesore! Seeing him practicing every day with that oversize sword of his was simply annoying!¡± he continued his rant. ¡°He was just an insignificant prince who would never have a chance on the throne. I was waiting for him to throw that stupid bastard sword away and stay out of my sight, like the rest of our useless brothers, yet he learned to raise that sword and wield it around with those twig arms of his, even though all he knew were two moves. Even though not a single instructor wasted their time to teach him anything useful.¡± ¡°His tenacity is his strength, your highness,¡± Rode said, which earned him a glare from his master. ¡°Were you not the one who commissioned the royal blacksmith to forge the sword he is using? I remember you told him to make it much bigger and heavier than a regular bastard sword.¡± ¡°Exactly. It was the same type of irregular long swords that no name blacksmiths mass produced during the War of Liberation.¡± ¡°And wasn¡¯t that what he wanted?¡± Rode reminded him. ¡°The Golden Hero of legend was said to have fought with an unusually large bastard sword himself.¡± ¡°That¡¯s right, they said that the Golden Hero could wield that sword single-handedly, even though it was as tall as he was.¡± ¡°I remember Prince Simon was pretty small when he started practicing his sword as well,¡± Rode said with a chuckle. ¡°Hmph. It was those foolish tales that put that silly idea in that worm¡¯s head,¡± Juno snorted. ¡°I told father to send him to the expedition to get rid of him,¡± he went on, ¡°I was hoping he would be able to slow the monster down, or at least fill its stomach enough to satisfy it and make it easier for me to slay it. But no. He had to kill the damn thing and be the kingdom¡¯s ¡®Hero¡¯.¡± ¡°And it seems that he really did become the real hero,¡± said Rode. Juno couldn¡¯t help but agree and admit his defeat. ¡°It must be true what they say, that the gods prefer ignorant idiots over proper nobles like myself.¡± ¡°Thus, you must act as a true noble and accompany your brother to the capital to face the king,¡± added Rode. ¡°I have no other choice left, do I?¡± Prince Juno shook his head sadly. ¡°Like you said, let the other nobles judge him. Let¡¯s see how he would fare in the company of the real monsters in the capital.¡±
Go to Part 53
Part 52 – A New Weapon Simon stared around the small room his brother assigned to him. It was a simple room with a bed, a wash basin on a table with, and a trunk for his belongings. It reminded him of his old room back in the princes¡¯ dormitory. Though his old room was a bit bigger with a wardrobe and a study table by a bay window, still, they both looked simple yet cozy. He found it quite funny that he was actually missing his old room now. ¡°Simple, yet cozy...¡± he mumbled to himself. ¡°That was how my life used to be. Now, everything seems to be so complicated.¡± He sighed and let himself fall on the bed he was currently sitting on. ¡°Will is no longer with me,¡± he said, closing his eyes. ¡°Nell is gone as well, and my brother and his retinue are trying to kill me for some reason...¡± He thought back to the previous evening. To the knights that almost took his life. How he was forced to fight them and kill them instead. ¡°It was... so easy...¡± Simon opened his eyes once more and stared at his large sword propped against the wall. ¡°Why have I been wasting my time with such a cumbersome weapon as a bastard sword, when a normal sword was so much easier to use...¡± he asked himself. ¡°What have I been enduring all this time, when I could have easily beaten them all, or at least, fought back to defend myself?¡± Simon stood up and held the large sword in his right hand. It was heavy. In fact, it was so heavy and cumbersome, that he could hardly raise it up when he first got it when he was eight. He wanted to be like the Golden Hero, after all, and starting early was the only way to do so. At least that was what his brothers Juno and Largos told him. They even asked the royal blacksmith to make him a customized bastard sword, since there was none in the royal armory. It was so heavy that it took him three months to properly raise it with both hands, and a whole year to finally swing it from the top of his head to the tip of his toes. They said he needed to learn how to use it with one hand. That the Golden Hero held a sword in his left and wielded magic on his right. It took him two years to use the sword properly with each hand, and he plans to learn magic when he turns 18 in 3 more years. There is so much more he plans to learn, but all he could do were two moves ¨C a downward slash, and a stab. His brothers, as well as the royal instructors, didn¡¯t teach him anything else, since according to them, a bastard sword uses a completely different style from the kingdom¡¯s one-handed sword play. Aside from the fact that he was still far from perfecting those two basic moves. ¡°Were they just making fun of me all this time?¡± If you come across this story on Amazon, it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it. Simon slashed the air in front of him in a fluid motion, the air current causing the curtains to flutter. He can easily lift his bastard sword now, after years of daily practice, but he had no idea that he could move the way he did yesterday. Well, the longsword he got from the fallen bandit was so much lighter, after all. It was so easy to swing around, that he was able to wield it in ways he didn¡¯t think possible with his huge bastard sword. Gingerly, he tried moving the way he moved before. He slashed at the air around him, down to the left, parry, straight to the right, up, parry left, and down again. These were moves that he used to defend himself. Moves that killed his opponents. And though his movements were much slower compared to yesterday¡¯s, he realized that he could do it with his bastard sword as well. ¡°I guess all my training payed off.¡± He tied a belt with a guard across his back where he fit his bastard sword in, then took the pouch of money his brother gave him. He tied it to his left side and went out of his room where he found his brother¡¯s knight, Sir Trix standing guard. ¡°I wish to go out,¡± he told the knight. ¡°Can you accompany me?¡± ¡°Of course, your highness, Prince Simon,¡± Sir Trix answered with a slight bow. ¡°Where do you plan to go to with your sword in tow?¡± he asked curiously. ¡°I merely plan to look around town,¡± Simon replied. ¡°I don¡¯t have a place in particular, though I may buy some things I might find interesting along the way.¡± With that, Simon went downstairs without checking if Trix was following behind him. He headed towards the town center, looking at the shops along the way. There were traders, bakers, craftsmen, brothels, taverns, and general stores, but he passed them all and stopped in front of an armory next to a blacksmith¡¯s shop. ¡°Can I help you?¡± a hairy man with a bare chest shaped like a barrel asked him as he stepped inside the sweltering shop. ¡°Yes, I would like to look at your swords,¡± said Simon. The blacksmith noticed the huge sword on his back. ¡°Are you lookin¡¯ to buy a new claymore, or are you plannin¡¯ to buy somethin¡¯ else?¡± ¡°Claymore?¡± Simon¡¯s head slightly tilted. ¡°Since you seem to prefer that.¡± The man pointed at the sword on his back. ¡°Oh, this is my bastard sword.¡± Simon took the sword from its guard and showed it to the blacksmith who snorted as he laughed. ¡°What bastard sword?¡± the man snickered. ¡°That there is a two-handed claymore, if ever I¡¯ve seen one!¡± The man took the sword from Simon and brandished it around with both hands. ¡°A bastard¡¯s a hand and a half. This here is a two handed sword, mighty heavy one, too, with a broad blade about five feet long... I see it¡¯s made of good steel, is this newly minted?¡± ¡°It was recently repaired since it got badly chipped...¡± Simon replied. He did notice that his sword looked much better after it got repaired. The blade was much sharper, the metal sheen, shinier, and the weathered grip was replaced with new, plush leather. If it wasn¡¯t for the old familiar wooden pommel he carved himself with his family¡¯s crest, he would think that the sword was a completely different one. (It actually was.) ¡°Then why are you looking for a new one? This one¡¯s in great condition,¡± the blacksmith asked, scratching his head. ¡°Well, actually, I was thinking of buying something... lighter...¡± ¡°Hmm, come to think of it, you¡¯re too skinny for somethin¡¯ this big.¡± The blacksmith stared at Simon from head to toe. ¡°I kinda thought you were a page bringin¡¯ his master¡¯s sword in for repairs...¡± he gave Simon a friendly grin and patted his shoulder. ¡°I was a bit surprised when you pulled this sword out with one hand. Guess you¡¯re pretty used to handlin¡¯ it.¡± He proceeded to check Simon¡¯s sinewy arms with a pleased nod. ¡°You should add more meat to your diet and to your arms as well!¡± he added with a laugh. ¡°Strength is one thing, but I bet you wouldn¡¯t last long wavin¡¯ that thing around!¡± ¡°T-thank you for the suggestion,¡± Simon replied shyly. ¡°Now, what kind of sword would you like to buy?¡± ¡°A regular sword I can easily carry around, please,¡± he answered, ¡°something I could easily use to defend myself.¡± ¡°Hmm, a second sword, huh?¡± The blacksmith went to a display rack by the wall where several weapons where hung in display and took two swords from it. ¡°Then I suggest a gladius.¡± He handed him a short sword first. ¡°It¡¯s good for close combat, compared to that cumbersome claymore of yours, or you can use a spatha that has a longer reach.¡± He gave him the other, slightly longer sword next. Simon held the two swords in both hands, testing its weight and balance. ¡°I think I prefer this spatha,¡± he said after a while. It was about the same shape and size as the sword he wielded yesterday. ¡°Good choice!¡± the blacksmith slapped Simon¡¯s lower back. ¡°That¡¯ll be 24 silver pieces, 28 and I¡¯ll throw in a sheath and a belt as well!¡±
============ Go to Part 55 ============
Part 53 – The Brat The two prince¡¯s retinue arrived at the nearest town three hours later. They didn¡¯t bother to stop by small villages to save time, and went straight to the nearest inn upon their arrival. ¡°Is that all the luggage you have?¡± Juno asked his brother when he noticed that he was only carrying a traveling bag and a big sword he took from the carriage¡¯s top baggage area. ¡°These are my personal belongings,¡± replied Simon who dropped them on the ground. ¡°I don¡¯t really own much stuff...¡± he said shyly. ¡°Is that so?¡± Juno asked with a frown. ¡°Didn¡¯t I give you some clothes before?¡± ¡°Oh, I gave some of them to my friend Nell before we parted ways,¡± he explained. ¡°After all, didn¡¯t you say that you would be buying me some new ones when we reach the capital to visit the Emperor?¡± Prince Juno stared at Simon. His brother had the same stupid smile on his face as always, but with what has been happening lately, he just couldn¡¯t tell if he was being serious, or being sarcastic. He decided to just play it safe. ¡°That¡¯s right, I¡¯ll be buying you new clothes in the capital. All the clothes from our kingdom are hopelessly out of style after all. In the meantime, why don¡¯t you head upstairs to your room for some rest?¡± ¡°I¡¯m on my way to my room right now,¡± replied Simon, ¡°but I would like to look around town for a bit, later on.¡± ¡°Bring one of the knights as company if you plan to do so,¡± said Juno. ¡®I can¡¯t have you doing things behind my back, after all,¡¯ he thought to himself, before handing Simon a small bag of coins. ¡°Here¡¯s some money. Go buy yourself anything you desire.¡± ¡°Oh! T-thank you, brother!¡± Simon said, surprised. He couldn¡¯t believe his royal brother would ever bother about him! ¡®My brother Juno really is the best!¡¯ he thought to himself as he made his way back to his carriage. ¡°Mas- Sir Will!¡± he called to the bearded knight. ¡°Look at this! My brother gave us some money to treat ourselves while we¡¯re in town!¡± ¡°Yeah, whatever,¡± Will replied grumpily. ¡°Now get off the carriage and take your friend with you! I still need to take the horses to the stables.¡± ¡°Oh, okay, let me put my things upstairs first, then we can all go to the marketplace together!¡± ¡°Hey, wait a¨C!¡± Simon was already gone before Will could call him back. ¡°Haah... that brat...¡± This story originates from a different website. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there. Will took the carriage to the stables and knocked three times on its door. ¡°You can come out now,¡± he called to Lady June in a whisper. ¡°Thank you, Sir Will,¡± replied the young lady as she stepped out of the beaten carriage. She had with her a bulky looking bag which she carried without difficulty. Will stared at it suspiciously. ¡°I guess I should check myself in the inn as well.¡± ¡°Mm. Hurry up. Simon plans to look around town with you.¡± ¡°Will you be coming with us as well, Sir Will?¡± ¡°Simon can take care of himself.¡± ¡°I guess you have a point there,¡± June said with a smile, ¡°he is our kingdom¡¯s Hero after all.¡± Will was expecting her to be sarcastic, but it looked like the young lady have found genuine respect for Simon. ¡°I expect you to do the same,¡± he said instead. ¡°I beg your pardon?¡± June¡¯s smile faded. ¡°You¡¯re pretty strong,¡± Will looked at June¡¯s bag. June instinctively held it tighter to her chest. ¡°A lightening spell, huh?¡± said Will. ¡°And I can feel the mana seeping out of the magic books hidden in your bag.¡± ¡°H-how can you tell?¡± June asked wide-eyed. Will ignored her question. ¡°It¡¯s easy to trick the idiots in this backwater country, but don¡¯t think that people in the capital are the same,¡± he went on. ¡°They could easily detect you and restrain you and send you straight to the magic tower as an unregistered magician, unless you get to the Royal Academy first and take their awakening exam.¡± ¡°T-then... what do you suggest I do?¡± June asked him desperately. ¡°Let me see that bag.¡± June handed her bag to Will uncertainly. Will took the bag and quickly opened it, pulling out two thick, leather bound books from inside. ¡°Hmm, nice selection. I didn¡¯t know there were still copies of these two books of magic.¡± ¡°They were part of my great-great-grandfather¡¯s secret personal collection,¡± June said proudly. ¡°Those grimoires are from the two greatest Magus in all history, Soloman the Wise, and Heras the Beautiful.¡± ¡°Yes, I can see that,¡± Will said flatly. ¡°So, are you a magician as well, Sir Will? How were you able to sense me? Do you know how I can hide my magic?¡± ¡°Your magic, you can hide by not using it,¡± said Will. ¡°Unless you have a cloaking spell that can hide your ability from others?¡± ¡°Oh, right! I do have something like that!¡± June replied. ¡°Now, your books...¡± ¡°I don¡¯t think I can use a cloaking spell on my books, though,¡± June pipped in. ¡°I tried, but they seem to be immune to magic.¡± ¡°Haa...¡± Will heaved a deep sigh. ¡°Use this then...¡± He took a pouch hanging from his belt and opened it. He then took out a smaller pouch from within. ¡°I¡¯m just lending this to you, mind you,¡± he said with a frown. ¡°I want it back as soon as you get in the Royal Academy.¡± ¡°Okay, thank you, but what¨C¡± Before she could say more, Will took the two large grimoires and stuffed them both inside the small pouch. ¡°Oh my goodness! Is that a dimensional pouch?!¡± she gasped. ¡°My father has been looking all over the kingdom to buy one!¡± ¡°Whatever. Share it with the kid. Don¡¯t lose it!¡± ¡°The kid? Oh, you mean Prince Simon?¡± ¡°Now, I need to leave before the kid corners me again.¡± ¡°You¡¯re leaving? But aren¡¯t you part of our knight envoy?¡± ¡°Was. You don¡¯t need me now. Besides, that bastard Juno is starting to get suspicious.¡± ¡°Prince Juno?¡± ¡°Take care of that idiot Simon. He still thinks his big brother is a saint no matter how many times the bastard tries to get rid of him.¡± ¡°Get rid of whom?¡± June asked, feeling lost and confused. ¡°I know you¡¯re not stupid, Lady June,¡± Will told her. ¡°Put two and two together. It¡¯s up to you to tell that idiot who his brother really is, just keep him out of harm¡¯s way `till he reaches the capital, then let the emperor take care of him instead.¡± Will grinned at her. ¡°I say, he¡¯ll make a good enough Hero, something he can make use of.¡± ¡°But... do you really need to leave, Sir Will?¡± Will no longer replied. He simply looked at June with unfathomable eyes, the color of the morning sun. June stared at those golden orbs until he raised a hand to wave goodbye, and was suddenly gone.
============ Go to Part 56 ============
Part 54 – The Saintess, the Beastman, and the Golden Hero ¡°I wanna hear the rest of the story!¡± Nell insisted with a cute pout, that his two companions couldn¡¯t help but sigh in surrender. ¡°Well then, listen well...¡± said lady June. The Golden Hero who fought in the War of Liberation and actually defeated the Demon King 20 years ago, was a 12-year-old farmer¡¯s son clad in mismatched armor he picked up in the battlefield. That was the truth. He fought, swinging an over sized bastard sword in his left hand as if it was merely a twig. He also wielded powerful magic that no one can surpass. It took him five years to defeat the Demon King and his minions with the help of his six companions which included a holy knight, a barbarian, a witch and a healer. When the fighting was over, the holy knight became Emperor, the barbarian became a Beast Master, the witch became the Grand Meister, the healer, a Saintess, and the warrior, the Golden Hero of legend. The emperor wanted his companions to stay by his side, so he married the Saintess whom he had fallen in love with as a consort and asked the Golden Hero to marry his sister, the Grand Meister. But the Golden Hero decided to leave the capital in search of more adventures and refused to be tied down by friends, family, and most of all, by politics... ¡°Bullshit!¡± Nell shouted at June. ¡°Just where in hell did you get all that crap from?¡± ¡°Like I said, my family has access to actual journals and chronicles from twenty years ago. Records that were banned and hidden by the royal family themselves!¡± ¡°And why would they hide such things?¡± Nell points an accusing finger at her. ¡°Why would the Hero Emperor fake the records when so many people had actually seen him and his heroic deeds? The only thing that¡¯s right in your story is that the emperor married the saintess! They say the party lasted for seven day and seven nights!¡± ¡°That¡¯s correct,¡± June nodded in reply, ¡°but he married her as a consort. The saintess was a commoner, after all. He needed a royal princess to keep the bloodline pure and solidify his position as a king.¡± ¡°What the hell are you babblin¡¯ about?¡± Nell¡¯s almost transparent brows knitted, his eyes filling with tears. ¡°That¡¯s bullshit! Why would the emperor take the saintess as a side chick?!¡± ¡°Nell, royal blood is essential to keep the throne, it means that he needs an empress from an influential noble family to get the support of all the rest of the nobles,¡± explained Simon. ¡°Only by joining forces with other powerful families can you gain the loyalty of others.¡± The genuine version of this novel can be found on another site. Support the author by reading it there. ¡°But we¡¯re talkin¡¯ `bout the Golden Hero and the Saintess here!¡± Nell said stubbornly. ¡°Besides, wasn¡¯t the last emperor a demon? What¡¯s so royal about him?!¡± ¡°He wasn¡¯t really a demon, he was just viewed as one!¡± said June, her voice rising with irritation. ¡°And how many times must we tell you, that the current emperor is not the real Golden Hero?!¡± she snapped. ¡°So, are you saying that the current emperor is a liar?¡± Nell asked them both. ¡°That he took all the glory for himself and erased the real Hero¡¯s existence?!¡± ¡°He didn¡¯t really need to,¡± June replied. ¡°All he did was remove the real Hero¡¯s name from all the history books. The people did the rest. They naturally thought that the new emperor was the Golden hero. The emperor also had golden hair, after all, but his eyes were blue like his sister¡¯s.¡± ¡°I guess you could say, he let the rumors spread that he was the Golden Hero and didn¡¯t bother correct them,¡± Simon said thoughtfully. ¡°Exactly,¡± June replied. ¡°Since the real Hero declined Imperial Princess Ann Maralict¡¯s hand in marriage, he declared him as an ingrate and banished him from the kingdom.¡± ¡°So...¡± Nell looked seriously at June. ¡°Where is the real hero now?¡± June looked at him just as seriously. ¡°Who knows?¡± came her reply, causing Nell to curse once more. ¡°One thing is for sure, though,¡± June went on, ¡°there can only be one hero in existence at a time.¡± The two looked at Simon who was stifling a yawn. ¡°That¡¯s why I¡¯m positive that the real Golden Hero is just hiding somewhere the emperor cannot find him,¡± continued June. Simon felt his face redden. ¡°I think so, too!¡± Nell agreed. ¡°But how do you know if the Hero is still alive or dead? ¡°Through manifestations, of course!¡± said June. ¡°A new hero would suddenly appear from the populace as soon as the old one expires.¡± Again, the two looked doubtfully at Simon. ¡°Anyway, the same goes with the Saintess and the Beast Master. That¡¯s why the second saintess was ordained when the royal consort died ten years ago. These are the three sacred titles of legend. They are the ones who keep the balance of peace in the empire.¡± ¡°Wow, this is the first time I heard about ¡®sacred titles¡¯...¡± said Simon who listened to June with renewed interest. ¡°I read about them in an ancient book from my family¡¯s collection!¡± June said proudly. ¡°The three are there to guide the rulers of the magic tower and the royal palace and to keep them in check.¡± ¡°You mean, the Emperor and the Grand Meister?¡± asked Simon. ¡°Exactly.¡± ¡°So, there¡¯s the knight, the barbarian, the saintess, and the magician...¡± Nell mumbled, ¡°but didn¡¯t you say that the Hero had six companions?¡± ¡°I read about that too,¡± said Simon. ¡°Well, they say that they had a thief in their company, but no one had ever actually seen them, nor knew what happened to them.¡± ¡°That makes five!¡± ¡°That¡¯s right,¡± June said with a nod. ¡°The sixth companion was a traitor who died the day they defeated the demon king.¡± The inside of the carriage went silent as the information sank in. ¡°So... they didn¡¯t know that they were with a traitor all along?¡± Nell asked wide eyed, making him look even younger. ¡°Yes, and according to records, the Hero had to kill the traitor himself.¡± Silence reigned once again until Simon stifled another yawn. ¡°Well, it¡¯s getting late, would you two like some more beef jerky before we turn in for the night?¡± ¡°I want to hear more stories!¡± Nell insisted. ¡°Look for someone else to tell them to you, then,¡± said June who pulled her blanket up to her chin as she lay on the seat she was previously hiding in. ¡°We¡¯ll tell you more stories tomorrow, Nell,¡± Simon assured him, ¡°as soon as we find out where we currently are.¡±
============ Go to Part 57 ============
Part 57 – A New Morning June woke up feeling sore. Her back and neck were sore, as well as her arms and legs, for she was lying curled up on her side, in a narrow bed with a thin cushion that made her whole body feel... yes, very sore. Her right arm, particularly so. She groaned and tried to stretch her legs, ending up kicking a wooden wall. Suddenly, the whole room began to shake! ¡°Stupid woman! Why can¡¯t you just stay still!¡± came an angry voice from the floor, followed by several other expletives. ¡°Wha¨C?!¡± June was so surprised that she sat bold upright. The room began to sway once more. ¡°What did I just tell you?!¡± the angry voice also shouted once more. ¡°Nell, please don¡¯t yell at Lady June, you¡¯re just scaring her even more.¡± ¡°Who... wha... where am I?!¡± June blurted out. ¡°It¡¯s just us, Prince Simon and my friend Nell the novice priest,¡± Simon told her. ¡°Don¡¯t you remember what happened last night? We¡¯re currently in a carriage in the Eastern part of the Twilight forest.¡± ¡°Twilight forest?¡± June rubbed her temple. ¡°You mean... it wasn¡¯t all just a dream?!¡± It took June some time before she could catch her bearings. ¡°Sorry, I¡¯ve never been a morning person...¡± she mumbled. ¡°It¡¯s fine, as long as you¡¯re okay,¡± replied Simon. ¡°We are planing to look around the area after having some breakfast, but before that, Nell should take a look at your injury first.¡± ¡°Oh, thank you...¡± June looked at the novice priest who kept glaring at her. ¡°Is there something wrong?¡± she asked him. ¡°Hmph. Just stay seated and reach out your hand to me.¡± ¡°Don¡¯t mind him,¡± said Simon with an apologetic smile, ¡°he¡¯s still a bit upset after hearing the truth about the Golden Hero.¡± ¡°I am not upset!¡± Nell said stubbornly. ¡°I still stand firm and loyal to my emperor, unlike you treacherous bastards!¡± ¡°Oh, suit yourself, then,¡± said June without much interest. ¡°As my father said, never argue with another person¡¯s beliefs, may it be in, politics or religion.¡± ¡°How very wise of him,¡± Simon agreed. ¡°Anyway, there¡¯s still some beef jerky left, as well as some buns. I¡¯m afraid that¡¯s all we¡¯ve got, though. We were supposed to reach the town of Eldor last night, after all.¡± ¡°Will we have to catch something for lunch, then?¡± asked Nell excitedly. ¡°I¡¯m afraid so,¡± replied Simon. ¡°I have never hunted before, though, but I still have my sword, and I¡¯m sure we can find some edible plants and fruits here in the Twilight Forest.¡± ¡°That¡¯s if its inhabitants don¡¯t eat us first,¡± Nell pipped in. ¡°Well, most monsters are nocturnal,¡± June pointed out, trying to lighten the mood. ¡°I also have an extensive knowledge of different flora and fauna around the continent, so I¡¯m hopeful that we could at least find some herbs to eat.¡± ¡°What¡¯s a fauna?¡± Nell asked with a frown. ¡°It means animals,¡± Simon replied. ¡°S¡¯that so?¡± He harrumphed and let go of June¡¯s hand. ¡°There. Any better?¡± ¡°Oh...¡± June rotated her arm a couple of times. ¡°Thank you, it feels so much better now... it¡¯s as if it didn¡¯t get injured in the first place!¡± ¡°See, Nell is a magnificent healer!¡± Simon said proudly. ¡°So, where do we go now?¡± Nell asked, his ears turning red. June couldn¡¯t help but smile at the beautiful boy whose skin was as fair as his platinum hair. ¡°First we need to look at our surroundings,¡± said June. ¡°Careful!¡± Nell reminded her as she moved towards the window. This book is hosted on another platform. Read the official version and support the author''s work. She hang her head outside to take a look. Everywhere she looked was covered by leaves. ¡°It looks like we¡¯re surrounded by wall-to-wall foliage...¡± ¡°Yeah, we noticed,¡± Nell retorted. ¡°I think we should try climbing down,¡± Simon suggested. ¡°We could use the horses¡¯ reins, I noticed they are still connected to the carriage.¡± ¡°Then we should first take all the things we need and make our way down to the forest floor,¡± said June. The three companions did just that. They opened the doors and noticed that the carriage has wedged between two very thick branches. It was a bit wobbly, but it seems that it won¡¯t just fall off. Simon volunteered to hang on the carriage¡¯s right side to reach the driver¡¯s seat and get the reins. June and Nell braced themselves on the carriage¡¯s left side as he went out the door, and returned later with some good news. ¡°I can see down the tree from the driver¡¯s seat,¡± he told the two. The ground doesn¡¯t seem to be that far off, we can simply climb down using the reins.¡± ¡°Let¡¯s do that then,¡± said June, standing up. ¡°Right, you two go ahead, let me just get our luggage from beneath the seats and on top of the carriage roof.¡± ¡°I¡¯ll help, even though someone threw all of my stuff away,¡± said Nell, glaring at June. ¡°I can give you some change of clothes if you like?¡± Simon told him. ¡°I¡¯m fine with my hooded tunic. I was getting tired of that veil anyway. Good thing someone got rid of all my spares.¡± ¡°Look, I¡¯m sorry, okay?!¡± June snapped. ¡°I told you, I¡¯ll pay you back as soon as we get to town!¡± June was the first to descend. ¡°Float!¡± she said as she jumped off the thick tree branch and slowly floated down to the forest floor. She looked up smugly at her companions as soon as she reached solid ground. ¡°Need help?¡± she asked Nell with a grin. Nell ignored her and went down with the reign¡¯s help. ¡°How about you, Simon?¡± ¡°In a minute... can you clear out from beneath the carriage so I can drop our stuff?¡± The two stepped aside. Nell went to look around the gigantic tree while June waited for Simon by the thick trunk. He then dropped their bags down, as well as some folded blankets, and even the seat cushions. ¡°Is that it?¡± asked June when nothing more seemed to be dropping from above. ¡°Wait... can you pick the stuff and place them by the side¡± There was a flash of silver as a large sword dropped down flat on the ground. ¡°What the...¡± ¡°Okay, that¡¯s about it!¡± ¡°Is that your sword?¡± June asked Simon who was currently dangling down the reins. ¡°Yes, it¡¯s my bastard sword, the royal blacksmith personally made it for me!¡± Simon said proudly. ¡°That¡¯s a bastard sword?¡± June¡¯s brows furrowed. ¡°It looks more like a claymore! Do you plan to drag that thing around the forest?!¡± she asked once more. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I¡¯m used to it.¡± Upon saying that, Simon picked up the sword and lifted it halfway off the ground. ¡°I¡¯ve trained real hard to wield this sword,¡± he said shyly, ¡°as you can see, I can pick it up with one hand, now!¡± ¡°T-that¡¯s just it!¡± June exclaimed. ¡°A bastard sword is a hand and a half sword, meaning you usually swing it in one hand, with some aid with the other hand. It should measure about 45 inches... that thing... it¡¯s aboutfive feet long!¡± ¡°Well, I wanted to have a bastard sword like the Golden Hero of legend, so...¡± ¡°Crazy! And your arms being that thin...¡± Simon was surprised when June suddenly approached him and pulled his sleeves up to grope at his arms. June was surprised as well. Simon¡¯s arms did look thin, but the muscle underneath was as hard as iron. ¡°Hey, you two finished groping each other?¡± June felt her face burn. She quickly let go of Simon¡¯s arm and faced Nell who was standing right behind her. ¡°I-I wasn''t groping anything!¡± she said guiltily. ¡°I was simply making sure that Simon was okay carrying that heavy sword!¡± ¡°Oh, wow, it¡¯s a bastard sword!¡± Nell said wide-eyed. ¡°Can I see it?!¡± ¡°O-of course!¡± said Simon whose face have turned a dark shade of red. Simon placed the sword, tip first on the ground, where it dug an inch into the soft earth. ¡°Wow! How come you never showed me this sword before?¡± Nell asked while fussing around the sword. ¡°I couldn¡¯t use it while I was injured,¡± replied Simon. ¡°Also, the royal blacksmith had to fix it after my battle with the behemoth. It got quite chipped and cracked back then.¡± ¡°Woah! Just like the Golden Hero¡¯s sword!¡± mussed Nell who touched its hilt and tried to lift it with both hands. It hardly moved an inch. ¡°Well then, I think it¡¯s time we take a look around the area,¡± said Simon as he lifted the bastard sword and replaced it in the guard on his back. ¡°Are you really taking that sword with you?¡± June asked again. ¡°Well, we might encounter some wild animals along our way...¡± ¡°Also monsters and demons!¡± added Nell. ¡°But... it looks so heavy!¡± June looked at Simon¡¯s skinny body once more. She just couldn¡¯t help but worry about the puny prince. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I¡¯m used to carrying my sword around,¡± replied Simon with a smile. ¡°What about the bags?¡± asked Nell, ¡°There¡¯s three in total, since someone threw mine away.¡± he added snidely. ¡°I can carry my bag, can you carry the other one with the supplies, Nell?¡± Simon looked at June. ¡°I can carry your bag too, if you...¡± ¡°I can carry my own stuff, thank you!¡± June quickly said, raising her bag from the ground. She has no plans of becoming a burden, just because she was a girl. Even if her bag was quite heavy due to the thick grimoires hidden underneath her clothes. She whispered a quick spell on her bag to lighten her load. ¡°There much better!¡± she said to herself. ¡°Come here and let me put a lightening spell on your luggage as well!¡± she told Simon and Nell. ¡°Oh, how convenient! Right, Nell?¡± said Simon with a smile. ¡°Hmph.¡± ¡°I hope this makes us even for me leaving your luggage.¡± ¡°So, where are we headed now?¡± said Nell, ignoring June¡¯s comment. I was thinking of traveling eastward to find the cliff edge where we fell off, just like June said last night. We¡¯ll trail along the cliff until we find a way back up to the Royal Highway. ¡°Okay, let¡¯s go!¡± said Nell. ¡°First, we need to know were the east is,¡± said Simon. ¡°That¡¯s where the sun is, right? Then let¡¯s go that way!¡± said Nell, pointing at the sun which was at the northeast direction from where they stood. ¡°Actually, the east is this way,¡± said June, holding a compass. ¡°Oh, good thing you have a compass with you,¡± said Simon, ¡°I was actually trying to decide where the sun rose!¡± ¡°Let¡¯s go, then!¡± Nell said again, leading the way. ¡°What¡¯s the hurry?¡± asked June, ¡°First, let¡¯s use a magical marker and some magic string so we can trace our way back here in case we need a place to spend the night.¡± ¡°Nice thinking,¡± said Simon, ¡°the carriage hidden in the canopy is a good place to rest, after all. The wild animals won¡¯t be able to reach it that easily.¡± ¡°So, can we go now?¡± Nell asked impatiently. ¡°Yes, we can go now,¡± June said with a sigh. And eastwards, the three went. ============ Go to Part 58 ============ Part 59 – Exploring the Twilight Forest ¡°So, where are we headed now?¡± Nell asked as soon as June and himself got their packs on their back, with Simon, placing his on his chest. I was thinking of traveling eastward to find the cliff edge where we fell off from. We can trail along the cliff wall until we find a way back up to the main road. ¡°Good idea, let¡¯s go!¡± said Nell. ¡°But first, we would need to know were the east is,¡± said Simon. ¡°It¡¯s where the sun is, right? Then let¡¯s go that way!¡± said Nell, pointing at the sun which was at the northeast direction from where they stood. ¡°Actually, the east is this way,¡± said June, holding a compass. ¡°Oh, good thing you have a compass with you,¡± said Simon, ¡°I was actually trying to decide where the sun rose!¡± ¡°Let¡¯s go, then!¡± said Nell, leading the way. The three were walking for some time, following an animal trail, when they reached a small clearing. ¡°Can we rest here for a while?¡± asked June who was not used to walking long distances. ¡°Yeah, my feet are starting to hurt!¡± Nell agreed. ¡°Okay, we can place some blankets on the ground underneath that tree.¡± Simon pointed at a tall tree whose dense canopy made a nice shaded area beneath it. ¡°Ah, thank goodness,¡± said June when she finally got a seat under the shade, ¡°is there any more food left?¡± ¡°I¡¯m afraid there¡¯s only two pieces of bread left,¡± said Simon after looking inside Nell¡¯s bag of supplies. ¡°I guess it¡¯s time to look for more food.¡± ¡°Let me look around, then,¡± June volunteered, ¡°I actually got some berries while we were walking, perhaps there are more around the vicinity.¡± ¡°Okay then, the two of us can look for food while Nell stays here to look after our things,¡± said Simon, carrying his bastard sword. ¡°Good luck!¡± Nell waved while lying comfortably on his back on the soft blankets. The two left the clearing and stepped back into the forest. ¡°Lady June, have you noticed something weird, though?¡± Simon asked his companion. What is it, Prince Simon?¡± June asked. ¡°We¡¯ve been walking for more than an hour, but we haven¡¯t seen a single animal,¡± he said. ¡°They say that Twilight forest is full of wild animals and monsters and I¡¯m glad we haven¡¯t encountered any yet...but how come we haven¡¯t seen any creatures at all?¡± June stared at Simon, her brows drawn together. ¡°Perhaps it¡¯s because we¡¯re near the forest¡¯s edge?¡± she suggested. ¡°Or perhaps the demons have eaten all the woodland animals in this area?¡± ¡°That¡¯s a scary thought,¡± Simon gave a nervous laugh. ¡°Anyway, those mushrooms are edible,¡± June pointed at some white mushrooms near a half fallen tree. ¡°And that wild apple tree has quite a lot of fruit.¡± ¡°Nice, let¡¯s take that back instead.¡± ¡°Look, there¡¯s a pear tree over there, too!¡± The two started picking mushrooms and fruits. They kept finding other edible fauna in the area that they soon lost track of time, until Simon pointed out that it was getting more noticeably darker. ¡°I can¡¯t tell where the sun is due to the dense overgrowth, but it¡¯s obvious that it¡¯s getting much darker.¡± ¡°I didn¡¯t notice it either...¡± said June, feeling nervous. She should have been more vigilant. They are currently inside the Twilight forest. She had read hundreds of stories chronicling the creatures inhabiting the place from travelers who were lucky enough to make it back alive. She should have used a simple reminding spell of alarm to keep track of time! ¡°We better get back to the clearing before it gets even darker,¡± Simon told her. ¡°I bet Nell¡¯s worried about us...¡± ¡°Y-yes, of course...¡± June looked back to where they came from. But where exactly did they come from? ¡°This way,¡± said Simon. ¡°I remember we picked some fruits from that pear tree and got some berries from that bush...¡± The two made their way back, but try as they may, they can¡¯t seem to find the path back to the clearing where they came from. ¡°Why don¡¯t we try going the other way?¡± June asked. ¡°I¡¯ve seen that berry patch four times already!¡± ¡°Okay... I¡¯ll try marking our way as well...¡± But again, the two found themselves lost. ¡®Damn!¡¯ June cursed beneath her breath. ¡®I should have used a marking spell and some magic thread to make sure we would get back to the clearing!¡¯ But it was too late to do so now. ¡°Let¡¯s go this way instead,¡± she told Simon. ¡°But that side doesn¡¯t show any sign of a trail...¡± ¡°That¡¯s why I want to try going there!¡± June snapped at him. It was getting even darker, and she has no plans of dying in that forest. ¡°Well, if you insist...¡± Simon led the way, pulling out his oversized sword as he did to leave notches on tree trunks along the way. They had been walking for a while when June heard something rustle to their right. ¡°What was that?¡± ¡°What was what?¡± asked Simon, equally nervous. The two looked at the shadowy overgrowth. ¡°There doesn¡¯t seem to be anything up there...¡± Simon whispered. ¡°Let¡¯s go on our way.¡± ¡°Wait.¡± June squinted her eyes, trying to see beyond the leaves of a thick bush. Finally, she lifted her hand and called the element of fire. ¡°Light.¡± Simon gasped as a small flame appeared at the tip of June¡¯s index finger. ¡°Y-you can use magic?¡± he asked in amazement, but June ignored him. She stretched out her hand towards the bush, lighting up the shadows, as a dozen red eyes stared back wildly at her. ¡°Move back!¡± shouted Simon. He pulled June pulled back just as several small furry creatures with sharp teeth and sharp claws jumped out from beneath the bush. ¡®TATATATARIIIN!¡¯ they screeched. ¡®TATATATARIIIN!¡¯ June saw Simon brandishing his sword with his right hand while his other tried to fend two off, one of which had its jaws around his arm. ¡°F-fire ball!¡± June cried. A ball of fire the size of her head appeared in front of her and hurled towards the bush, but the critters were small and fast, and too many. They simply dodged the fire and started going after her as well. ¡°F-Fire ball!¡± she shouted again. ¡°Fire ball!¡± she was able to hit some of the critters, but even more came out of the bushes. ¡°Fire ¨C ¡± She was cut off as furry critter jumped her from the side. It bit and clawed at her. The pain was so intense that she could hardly scream. All she could do was crawl away feebly, as more critters jumped at her and bit and clawed at her flesh. ¡®Tatarin monsters. White fur on the top of heads, and as well as lower body...¡¯ June suddenly remembered as she lay helpless on the ground. ¡®Nocturnal primates that hunt in packs of hundreds...¡¯ But the knowledge she was so proud of, are all useless now. She looked desperately for Simon, but even their kingdom¡¯s hero was being overwhelmed by the small critters. There were simply too many of them. She watched wretchedly as the younger boy gave a last thrust of his bastard sword, fending off three critters, as five more took its place. He was quickly covered by the furry creatures as he also fell helplessly to the ground.
============ bad ending ?? ============ Stolen content warning: this tale belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences elsewhere.
Part 55 – One of My Own Simon left the blacksmith¡¯s forge later, wearing his new sword on his hip, his bag of coins, noticeably lighter. ¡°Are you done, your highness?¡± Sir Trix asked him, sounding bored. He had stayed outside the smithy since it was too hot inside, and now he is starting to get bored and hungry. ¡°I would like to go to a tailor next.¡± It took the two of them a while to find a tailor, where Simon proceeded to look around for a suitable vest. ¡°Is there something you are looking for in particular?¡± Trix asked when they got to their third shop. ¡°I am looking for something made of a thick material that would prevent others from stabbing me in the back,¡± Simon replied flatly. ¡°Then we should have gone to an armory!¡± Sir Trix said impatiently. ¡°A good chain mail would do, or a leather vest made of thick animal hide, much better if it¡¯s monster material.¡± Simon watched Sir Trix who was going through the clothes beside him. He stayed outside the first two stores, but now, he has decided to enter with him. Obviously, the older knight was getting tired of waiting outside. ¡°Can you choose one for me?¡± he asked Sir Trix. ¡°Like I said, we would need to look for an armory first!¡± ¡°But the blacksmith I went to didn¡¯t carry any armor...¡± ¡°You need to find one who specializes on suit armor!¡± Sir Trix sighed. ¡°Is there a difference?¡± Simon asked with his head tilted to a side. ¡°Just follow me.¡± The two left the tailor¡¯s shop. Sir Trix looked around the area with his eyes up high. ¡°See there?¡± he pointed at a sign showing a hammer and a helm. ¡°That¡¯s the store we¡¯re looking for!¡± He led the way to the shop and entered it with Simon. ¡°Now hurry up and buy what you need, I¡¯m starting to get real hungry!¡± ¡°Yes, may I help you?¡± asked a middle-aged man with a grand looking curled mustache who approached them. ¡°Good day, sir, I¡¯m looking for a thick vest that could stop people from stabbing me in the back,¡± Simon told the merchant who¡¯s smile wavered a little. The merchant looked at the young lad in front of him from head to toe. He looked clean enough, though the large sword on his back looked out of place, also, his chaperon looks like a knight, meaning he¡¯s at least from a good family. ¡°Well, you¡¯ve come to the right place,¡± the merchant replied, regaining his composure. ¡°Please come this way where our finest vests made from top quality materials are displayed.¡± Stolen story; please report. He led his customers deeper inside the store and towards a rack of clothes where he proceeded to showcase one article after another. ¡°This, my dear customer, is made of dragon hide, it is stain resistant and fire proof as well,¡± he said, pulling out a vest made of shiny red scales. ¡°This one is made of iron bear hide that¡¯s both soft yet tough as iron,¡± he took another one with a deep brown furry collar scuff. ¡°This is made from the bark of the world tree, and has high magic resistance,¡± he continued, ¡°while this here is made of silver snake skin,¡± he said, pulling yet another one out. ¡°It is light and comfortable to wear, yet is as tough as iron, which is perfect for your visage.¡± ¡°How much is that one?¡± Simon pointed at the silver snake skin vest. ¡°Only 20 gold coins, dear customer,¡± the merchant said with a big grin. Simon took his small pouch and looked at the 5 silvers and 2 gold coins inside. ¡°Sir Trix, do you have any money with you?¡± ¡°No,¡± was the knight¡¯s quick reply. ¡°My brother can pay you back when we get back to the inn.¡± ¡°All I have with me are 3 gold and 5 silver coins,¡± Trix said with a frown. ¡°Didn¡¯t you bring your family crest with you?¡± ¡°I did, but why do you ask?¡± Simon questioned at his companion who gave an exasperated sigh. ¡°In some places, you can use your family crest as a credit assurance to pay merchants back at a later date or time...¡± ¡°Ahem...¡± The two were interrupted as the said merchant cleared his throat. ¡°I beg your pardon,¡± said the merchant, the smile on his face unwavering. ¡°Your crest is good, but I need gold.¡± ¡°I¡¯m afraid I don¡¯t have enough money with me...¡± said Simon, ¡°do you have anything worth 7 gold coins?¡± ¡°I¡¯m sure there are other stores that can cater to your needs, then,¡± said the merchant who patiently showed them out the door. ¡°Haa... where do you plan to buy good armor worth 7 gold coins?¡± Sir Trix said with an exasperated sigh as they left the armory shop. ¡°And you even plan to use my money as well!¡± ¡°But, I was able to buy a new sword for 24 silver coins...¡± ¡°Let me see that.¡± Simon was surprised when Sir Trix took his newly acquired sword and pulled it out of its scabbard. He braced himself when the knight lifted it up and unconsciously reached out for his bastard sword, but Trix simply raised it up to the light to look it over. ¡°This is just a beginner¡¯s sword,¡± said Trix who brandished it in his hands. ¡°The forging is good, but you can¡¯t exactly bring this to battle.¡± ¡°Why would I need something for battle?¡± Simon asked him suspiciously. ¡°Well, I noticed you¡¯re looking for something to defend yourself with after what happened yesterday. This sword is good for training, but it would easily get chipped if used in actually combat.¡± Trix handed the sword back to Simon. ¡°Is that so?¡± Simon took it back gingerly. ¡°Can you tell me more about swords, then?¡± ¡°Why do you have to buy a new one anyway?¡± Trix asked him. ¡°You finally getting rid of that bastard sword of yours?¡± ¡°I just find a smaller sword... easier to use...¡± Simon answered back thoughtfully. Trix looked at his young master and remembered how the small, skinny boy killed the knights who were sent to assassinate him the previous night. ¡°Well, your highness,¡± he replied, remembering his manners as well, ¡°a good sword really depends on the wielder. Even a practice sword can kill, and the best sword from a master blacksmith would be as good as tin foil if you don¡¯t know how to wield it.¡± Besides, he wouldn¡¯t want the 9th prince to be armed with a better sword, lest his true master, Prince Juno, decides to get rid of him again. ¡°Why don¡¯t you just use one of the swords the bandits left behind last night?¡± he asked Simon. ¡°I wanted one of my own.¡± ¡°Well, that sword will be good enough. Now, about that vest...¡± ¡°Can you teach me how to use it, then?¡± Simon interrupted him again. Trix didn¡¯t know how to reply. The first prince did tell them to do everything Prince Simon asked them to do, but he can¡¯t just teach the prince how to use a sword. He would need to ask Prince Juno about it first. ¡°If my brother agrees, I mean?¡± Simon added, as if he just read his thoughts. ¡°Oh... of course, if Prince Juno says so...¡± Trix was beginning to feel anxious. ¡°Now, I think that person over there is selling some armor,¡± said Simon, pointing at a peddler whose wares were strewn over a blanket along the street. Trix sighed as his ward walked towards a line of street vendors and had no choice but to follow along.
============ Go to Part 60 ============
Part 56 – A Regular Bastard Simon hurried to his room, left all his stuff behind, and rushed back down again towards the stables. He couldn¡¯t believe that he¡¯s reunited with his Hero and savior! He couldn¡¯t wait to ask him to teach him more about swordsmanship, after all, didn¡¯t he instruct him how to deal with the assassins yesterday? For sure, Sir Will will be staying with him this time, he was even secretly watching over him from the shadows! ¡°I¡¯m back!¡± he gasped, trying to catch his breath as he appeared besidetheir damaged wagon. ¡°Took you long enough...¡± June grumbled at him. Simon looked around the place. ¡°Where¡¯s Sir Will?¡± he asked. ¡°Gone.¡± ¡°What?¡± ¡°He just left. He said to take care and be a good hero in the capital and to watch out for your brother Crown Prince Juno. Oh, and you have to assist me as well!¡± she added with a smirk. ¡°But... we were going to the market together...¡± Simon looked disappointed. June frowned at the younger lad. ¡°Look, he said your brother was starting to get suspicious, and something about them trying to ¡®get rid¡¯ of you. Have you got any idea what he meant?¡± ¡°Why would my brother be suspicious?¡± Simon asked back. ¡°Of what? And who¡¯s getting rid of whom?¡± ¡°Well, now that we¡¯re on the topic, do you really think what your brother said about those bandits posing as your family¡¯s knights make sense?¡± June asked him. ¡°I mean, I know that our kingdom isn¡¯t that big and grand, but how stupid could your knights be, if they never realized that the people with them are bandits in disguise?¡± ¡°Well...¡± Simon paused to think. ¡°You do have a point there... But what would my brother have to do with that?¡± ¡°Aren¡¯t they your brother¡¯s knights?¡± ¡°Yes, but perhaps they were new recruits?¡± Simon pointed out with a smile. ¡°Besides, why would Brother Juno want to ambush himself?¡± ¡°Ugh... Simon... think for a minute,¡± said June with a grunt. ¡°Your brother didn¡¯t ambush himself. Did those bandits in disguise ever target your brother¡¯s carriage?¡± ¡°Well... no, but, we were much closer to the back, so maybe they attacked us first! Remember how my brother came to our aid later on?¡± ¡°Simon, I was watching from the carriage. I saw how they watched you defeat those knights by yourself before they decided to call your attention,¡± June told him. ¡°In fact, I was tempted to shout at them and tell them to help you out!¡± ¡°Well...¡± Simon¡¯s brows knitted as he thought of an excuse. ¡°Ah, then, perhaps they knew that I could easily win against those bandits since I was the hero who defeated the behemoth. Maybe they wanted to see how well I could fight?¡± He grinned at June awkwardly. This story originates from a different website. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there. ¡°Really, Prince Simon?!¡± June crossed her arms over her chest in irritation. ¡°Pardon me for being frank, your highness,¡± she continued, ¡°but Sir Will was right, you really are an idiot!¡± ¡°Wha¨C ?¡± ¡°You are a hopelessly gullible and ignorant child. I don¡¯t know if you¡¯re just naive or simply stupid!¡± she went on, not giving Simon a chance to speak. ¡°It¡¯s a good thing that I am traveling with you!¡± she added. ¡°Be thankful that Sir Will asked me to look after you until we reach the capital! If not, I bet you wouldn¡¯t last a night in this inn with the company you¡¯re with!¡± she harrumphed. ¡°Do you understand what I¡¯m saying?¡± ¡°I-I guess...¡± ¡°Then what do you say?¡± ¡°T-thank you?¡± Simon said cautiously. ¡°You¡¯re welcome! Now, hurry up and lead me to the inn so I can check myself in!¡± June harrumphed. ¡°After that, we¡¯re going to town to get you ready for the rest of our journey.¡± ... June paid for her room in gold. It was a good thing that the room next to Simon¡¯s was available. Good, too, that crown prince Juno has locked himself in his room with his attendant Rode. No one noticed when the two went down and left the inn to visit the marketplace. They headed towards the town center, looking at the shops along the way. They passed by a bakery, a shoemaker¡¯s store, a tavern, and a general store, where June bought several things which she all placed in a curious pouch tied to her belt. Later, they passed by an armory next to a blacksmith¡¯s shop where June pulled Simon inside. ¡°Are you going to buy a weapon as well?¡± he asked Lady June. ¡°Not for me, but for you. You need something to defend yourself with!¡± ¡°Are you still thinking that my brother means to harm me?¡± he asked June with a frown. ¡°Yes, but this is to protect yourself in general.¡± ¡°Can I help you?¡± a hairy man with a bare chest shaped like a barrel greeted them as they stepped inside the sweltering shop. ¡°I would like to buy a weapon for my friend,¡± said June. ¡°And what kind of weapon would you like to use?¡± asked the blacksmith. ¡°Actually, I already have a weapon,¡± Simon replied, ¡°it¡¯s a bastard sword.¡± ¡°You need something small and handy like a knife,¡± June told him. ¡°Well, we have a variety of knives here, but if bastard swords are your forte, then I might interest you with a new one.¡± The blacksmith went to a rack of weapons by the wall and took a knife and a sword back to where the two stood. ¡°Here¡¯s one of our finest knifes,¡± he said, handing Simon one with a serrated blade. ¡°And this here¡¯s a bastard sword I just forged last week.¡± ¡°Huh?¡± Simon stared at the sword the blacksmith held out to him with one hand. It was about as long as his leg. ¡°Isn¡¯t that just a one handed sword?¡± ¡°Well, basically, it¡¯s a hand and a half,¡± June knowingly pointed out. ¡°You use a bastard sword with one hand, with some aid with the other, since it¡¯s almost as long and heavy as a two handed sword. That¡¯s why it¡¯s called a bastard, because it¡¯s bastardized between a one-hand and a two handed weapon.¡± ¡°But...¡± Simon frowned. ¡°It¡¯s too small for a bastard sword!¡± He looked at the other racks around the room and went to a corner were several large weapons were placed. He picked one up with one hand and brandished it in front of him. ¡°Now, this looks more like a bastard sword!¡± he told June with a grin. ¡°That is a claymore, young master,¡± the blacksmith told him with a small laugh. ¡°Huh?¡± Simon frowned at him some more. ¡°That¡¯s too big to be a bastard sword, Simon, that¡¯s called a claymore or literally, ¡®a great, two-handed sword¡¯ used to deploy a large melee range of attack.¡± ¡°Your tutor is correct,¡± nodded the blacksmith in agreement. ¡°I¡¯m not his tutor, though,¡± replied June. ¡°But my bastard sword is about this big!¡± Simon insisted, lifting up the large claymore. ¡°Then I suggest you buy something smaller to defend yourself,¡± said June, ending the argument. ¡°It¡¯s not like you can drag something that big everywhere you go!¡± ¡°A good idea,¡± the blacksmith agreed, ¡°you should listen to your friend.¡± ¡°So, what do you plan to buy?¡± she asked her companion. ¡°Umm... I guess I could buy this small bastard sword...¡± ¡°How much is this sword worth?¡± June faced the blacksmith. ¡°Just 28 silvers, my lady,¡± he replied, rubbing his hands together. ¡°Twenty-eight silvers?¡± June raised her brows as she looked the sword over. ¡°The iron is not of the best quality, this is more of a practice sword than a regular weapon, I bet it wont last long in actual battle, don¡¯t you have anything better?¡± ¡°Ah, I see you got a good eye for weapons!¡± the blacksmith grinned at her. ¡°Step this way, my best work are in my inner workshop!¡± The two left the forge later with Simon carrying a regular bastard sword on his hip. ========== Go to Part 66 ========== Part 58 – A Proper Adventure ¡°This is great! I¡¯ve always wanted to have a proper adventure!¡± Nell said excitedly. ¡°Is that so?¡± Simon gave a small laugh. ¡°Have you never been outside the Stone Temple before?¡± ¡°Nope,¡± replied Nell. ¡°I¡¯ve only been there two years, almost. The old geezer bastard keeps tellin¡¯ me to learn to read and write and fix my language and won¡¯t even let me go with the other novices when they buy stuff from town!¡± ¡°How come?¡± asked Simon. June felt curious about the boy¡¯s past as well. ¡°It¡¯s `coz I was born in a brothel. It¡¯s another type of prison, and the boss there is still lookin¡¯ for me.¡± He glared at Simon after saying this. ¡°That¡¯s why I told you not to bring me to the capital!¡± he added. ¡°The boss¡¯ main office is over there, and I¡¯d rather die than get sold off to some fuckin¡¯ perv noble bastard again.¡± ¡°S-so... you were... a boy prostitute?¡± asked June, feeling sorry for the kid. ¡°It¡¯s called catamite, woman,¡± snapped Nell. ¡°I was about to be sold off to some fuckin¡¯ old geezer when they saw a mark on my ass and was sent to a temple instead.¡± ¡°Oh, thank goodness!¡± June sighed. ¡°I mean... the goddess¡¯ mark was on your butt?!¡± ¡°That¡¯s right, as I remember, all of the goddess¡¯ servants have the sign of the stigmata somewhere on their body,¡± Simon said with admiration. ¡°That means you¡¯re not just any healer, but an envoy of the goddess herself!¡± ¡°Hmph!¡± Nell looked smug. ¡°That pervert noble saw it while they were dressin¡¯ me up. Turns out he was some goddess fanatic and decided to send me to the main temple instead.¡± ¡°If that is so, then why is your boss still looking for you?¡± asked Simon. ¡°Well, who¡¯d want some loose change from a temple when you can earn so much more selling a holy catamite healer to perverted bastards in the city?¡± said Nell with a snort. ¡°They ambushed the cart I was ridin¡¯ while I was on my way to the temple of the Goddess of Healing. Good thing Will was travelin¡¯ near the area and decided to help me out.¡± ¡°I guess the goddess was looking out for you as her envoy!¡± said June, her hands clasped in prayer. ¡°Will the huntsman?¡± Simon asked, wide-eyed. ¡°Yeah, he was the one who took me to Weezer Village and sent me to the Stone Temple to train as a healing priest.¡± ¡°Wow... Will truly is such a benevolent person!¡± Simon said, beaming with admiration. ¡°Hmph, some benevolent person he is!¡± pouted Nell. ¡°I told him I¡¯d much rather be an adventurer! I wanted to be a hunter like him, but he told me that I should learn to be a healer since that¡¯s my ¡®calling¡¯ and that I should learn to read and write since I¡¯ll be livin¡¯ with them tight assed priests in their shitty temple!¡± ¡°But, didn¡¯t you say that you can¡¯t read and write...?¡± asked Simon. Love what you''re reading? Discover and support the author on the platform they originally published on. ¡°Exactly.¡± Nell looked at him stubbornly. ¡°I refuse to do something people force on me!¡± The two stared at the pouting boy in front of them. ¡°Ah, what a hardheaded youth you are,¡± June said, shaking her head. ¡°Shut up, woman!¡± Nell snapped at her. ¡°I don¡¯t wanna hear that from someone who threw my luggage away!¡± ¡°I thought we were over that already?¡± June snapped back. ¡°And stop calling me woman! I¡¯m only 17!¡± ¡°That makes you an old maid!¡± Nell said stubbornly to a seething June. ¡°You shoulda been married off by now!¡± ¡°What did you say?!¡± June seethed. ¡°Now, now, why don¡¯t we just concentrate on our surroundings?¡± Simon said as they went farther away from the hanging carriage. ¡°Right. Monsters get attracted to noise, after all,¡± June glared at Nell. The three traveled the forest, following an animal trail they found. Along the way, June would point at edible fruit trees, mushrooms, and berries which added to their breakfast. It was about an hour later that they came to a small clearing. The three were glad to be able to see the open sky again. ¡°Can we rest here for a while?¡± asked June who was not used to walking long distances. ¡°Yeah, my feet are starting to hurt!¡± Nell agreed. ¡°Okay, we can place some blankets on the ground underneath that tree.¡± Simon pointed at a tall tree with a dense canopy. ¡°Ah, thank goodness,¡± said June when she finally got a seat in the shade. ¡°would anyone like more fruits and berries?¡± she asked. ¡°Thank you, but I¡¯m quite full now,¡± Simon replied. ¡°Hey, how come we didn¡¯t see a single animal along the way?¡± Nell suddenly asked them with a pout. ¡°I wanna eat some meat! We should be hunting and cooking meat on a proper adventure!¡± ¡°I was actually thinking the same,¡± said Simon. ¡°What? You think this is a hunting expedition?¡± June frowned at both of them. ¡°No, I mean... this is the Twilight forest, isn¡¯t it supposed to be full of monsters?¡± asked Simon. ¡°Yet we haven¡¯t even seen a single creatureall morning... I mean, I can hear birds in the distance, but how come we haven¡¯t seen any wild animalsyet?¡± ¡°Hmm, now that you mentioned it...¡± June¡¯s brows knitted together. ¡°That¡¯s right!¡± agreed Nell. ¡°I couldn¡¯t even find where the horses that pulled our cart fell! I was hoping we could have some horse meat this morning!¡± ¡°You were planning to eat the horses?!¡± June stared at him in horror. ¡°It¡¯s still food!¡± Nell sneered at her. ¡°Perhaps the stronger monsters have eaten all the other animals in the area?¡± June seriously pondered. ¡°That¡¯s a scary thought,¡± Simon gave a nervous laugh. ¡°Then let¡¯s go further into the forest to hunt for lunch!¡± Nell said eagerly. ¡°Do you even know how to hunt?¡± June frowned at the kid. ¡°You should be thanking the goddess we haven¡¯t encountered any monsters yet!¡± ¡°June¡¯s right, we should continue looking for a way back up to the main road instead,¡± said Simon. ¡°But we¡¯ve been walking for hours!¡± cried Nell with a pout. ¡°And I need meat for energy!¡± ¡°It hasn¡¯t even been an hour since we left the tree where our carriage fell!¡± June pointed out. ¡°And aren¡¯t priests supposed to eat vegetables?¡± ¡°What a prejudiced bigot!¡± Nell yelled. ¡°Stop stereotypin¡¯ me, bitch! You shoulda just stayed at home and get married and cook for your husband and make kids!¡± ¡°How sexist!¡± June gasped, pointing at Nell. ¡°You see how that feels?¡± Nell snapped back at her. ¡°Please, can you keep your voices down?¡± Simon tried to calm them. ¡°At this rate, we wouldn¡¯t need to hunt for the monsters...¡± ¡°She started it!¡± Nell pointed back at June. ¡°This kid is so infuriating!¡± June started to yell as well. ¡°Okay, since it looks like it would be some time before we could leave the forest, why don¡¯t we try hunting for food?¡± said Simon, looking at Nell. ¡°Hell yeah!¡± said Nell with a fist bump. ¡°But looking for a way out should be our priority!¡± June protested. ¡°We¡¯ll just look around the clearing,¡± Simon said. ¡°We¡¯ll leave at once if we don¡¯t find anything.
============ CHOICES: What do you think should the three companions do?¡± [Look for a way out] go to Part 61 [Capture some lunch] go to Part 62 ============